Owner’s Manual
Graphic

Issue Date: October 2026
NOTE: Carefully read, understand and follow the instructions provided in this manual, and keep it in a safe place for future reference. If you have any doubt whatsoever regarding the use or care of your vehicle, please visit a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance or advice.
This Owner’s Manual should be considered as an integral part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle.
MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD., GATEWAY BUILDING, APOLLO BUNDER, MUMBAI - 400 039.
www.mahindra.com
FOREWORD
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing the Mahindra Vehicle.
We are privileged to welcome you to the Mahindra family.
Your vehicle represents Robust Quality, Ruggedness, Safety, Precision Workmanship and Distinctive Styling, which are our traditional values.
This documents contains important information on vehicle operation, that will help you make full use of the technical features available. To exercise better control on road, we suggest you to please take time to read, understand and familiarise with vehicle and its features. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, note that Authorized Mahindra Service Center knows your vehicle best, has company trained Technical Experts, Mahindra Genuine Parts and very much cares about your satisfaction.
We extend our best wishes for safe and pleasurable motoring.
Graphic
MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD.
1 GENERAL AND SAFETY PRECAUTION
1.1 Servicing and Summary Data
We suggest that you record the vehicle servicing data in the Warranty and Service Information Guide for future references.
We recommend you always use Mahindra Genuine Parts when performing repairs on the vehicle.
For all vehicle related issues and for any needs for Genuine replacement components, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
1.2 Safety Symbols
The safety symbols/Instructions given in this manual carefully read, understood and follow.
The legend of symbols
To emphasis the information and procedures regarding safety, use, maintenance, etc, the following symbols are used throughout the manual:
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or property damage.
NOTICE indicates important information relevant to the vehicle and it’s optimum use, to which particular attention must be paid.
If you see this symbol, it means “no”, “don’t do that”, or “never”.
Graphic
1.3 End of Life Disposal
Composition: Vehicle is made from steel, Aluminum, Lead, Copper, Wood, other plastics and miscellaneous parts. These materials are reusable by recycling them through a proper procedure. Some are hazardous to environment and living beings to be disposed as per local pollution board regulations.
Disposal: As batteries are made of lead, lithium and iron phosphate with solvents as electrolyte which are harmful. They can impact on environment and are to be disposed as per local pollution board regulations. Certain components of this vehicle such as seat belt pre-tensioner, airbag and battery may contain hazardous material. Special handling may be required for service or vehicle end-of-life disposal.Similarly ABS and other plastic panels, materials used are to be disposed to accredited agencies for recycling.Most of other materials are reusable, hence components are to be segregated as per their composition as hazardous and non-hazardous, disposed to accredited recycling agencies. Hence, it is advised to contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further information.
For more details:
https://www.mahindra.com/sustainability
https://youtu.be/Q5CMl3VcuNU
https://cerorecycling.com/
1.4 General Safety Information and Instructions
1. First-aid kit is placed in the glove box of the vehicle. Ensure it is not taken out of the vehicle at any point of time.
2. It is important to be aware that, throughout this manual, the terms “accident” and “accident-related” are used interchangeably. An accident may result in personal injury to the individual or a bystander, as well as property damage.
3. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays or wear in the seat belt webbing, or loose buckles, retractors, anchors or other loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
4. The lifespan of Mahindra products depends on many factors. Improper use, abuse or harsh use in general may compromise the integrity of the vehicle and significantly reduce its lifespan. The vehicle is also subject to wear over a period of time. Please have your vehicle regularly inspected by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center. If the inspection reveals any damage or excessive wear, immediately replace, or have the component serviced.
5. The vehicle identification plates are the only legal identification reference, hence it is necessary to keep them in good condition. Never modify data on the plates or remove them. It is illegal to remove or alter the numbers in the VIN plate.
6. Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When the vehicle is fully loaded, drive at a slow speed, especially when turning. Note that the center of gravity of the vehicle changes when the vehicle is fully loaded, and also if luggage is mounted on the roof carrier.
1.5 To the Users of the Mahindra Vehicle
When first driving the vehicle after long periods of non-usage, you may experience a temporary drive disturbance. This is a characteristic of the tyres and should be no reason for concern. The condition should correct itself within 5-15 km of driving. If the disturbance persists, have the vehicle checked by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
Driving and Drugs/Medication
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired through the use of prescription or non-prescription drugs or medication (even cough syrup). If you are taking any sort of drug or medication, be sure that it will not affect your driving ability.
Mobile Phones Warning
Use of electronic devices such as mobile phones, handheld devices, computers, portable radios or other by the driver while driving is dangerous. In exceptional conditions, if use of a mobile phone is necessary, use a hands-free system to ensure that the hands are free to drive the vehicle. Even hands-free does not ensure distraction free drive. Please comply with the legal regulations in your country, concerning the use of communication equipment in vehicles.
Do not leave power banks, mobile phones, laptops, e-cigarettes, or any other battery-operated devices inside a parked vehicle under direct sunlight. High cabin temperatures may cause these devices to overheat, resulting in battery damage, swelling, malfunction, and, in extreme cases, a fire hazard inside the vehicle
Driving Long Distances
When driving long distances, follow these tips to have a safe journey:
•  Take breaks at regular intervals.
•  Lack of sleep or fatigue will impact your ability to drive safely.
•  Exercise your eyes by shifting the focus of your eyes to different parts of the road.
•  Use stimulating beverages such as coffee or tea.
•  Relax and stay calm.
Running-in
Driving smoothly during first 1 000 km. will help to prevent abnormal and premature system wear. Proper running-in will improve the life of drivetrain and vehicle components.
A new engine may consume more oil during the first 1 000 km of running. This should be considered as a normal part of break-in and not interpreted as any problem with the engine.
Mahindra Genuine Parts
Mahindra uses high quality parts for building the vehicles. In the event that any parts need replacement, we recommend that you use only Mahindra genuine parts.
Non-Mahindra parts may harm vehicle performance and will not be covered by your Mahindra warranty.
The warranty does not cover problems caused by using non genuine parts.
Mahindra Genuine Accessories
A wide selection of quality accessories are available at Authorized Mahindra Service Center. These accessories have been specifically engineered to allow you to personalize your vehicle to suit your requirements and complement its style and aerodynamic appearance.
Each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets Mahindra’s rigid engineering and safety specifications. Every Mahindra accessory installed according to the Mahindra installation provisions comes with the respective accessory warranty.
Consult your Authorized Mahindra Service Center for detailed information about accessories available for your specific model variant.
For maximum vehicle performance and safety considerations, always keep the following information in mind:
•  The company shall not be liable / responsible for any damages / injuries, including consequential damages / injuries, resulting due to fitment of unauthorized aftermarket accessories and / or tapping / cutting wires in the wiring harness When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front and rear axle. Consult a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for specific weight information.
•  Bull bars and nudge guards are not recommended.
•  Accessories causing any change in vehicle specifications like wheel rims, bull bars, etc, may affect the performance of safety systems.
•  Mobile communication systems such as two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters and installed in your vehicle should comply with the local regulations and should be installed only by your Authorized Mahindra Service Center and can potentially affect the vehicle performance.
Vehicle Safety
When leaving your vehicle unoccupied:
•  Always remove the ignition key when you park the vehicle.
•  Incase of PKE, Please lock and take the key fob with you.
•  Close all the windows completely and lock all the doors.
•  Do not leave any valuables in your vehicle. If you must leave something in your vehicle, hide them and securely lock all the doors.
When Sleeping in Your Vehicle
1. Do not sleep in a parked car with closed windows. In particular, if you stay or sleep in the vehicle and the air conditioner or heater turned on, you can suffocate to death.
2. Sleeping in a closed space with the engine running puts you at high risk of suffocation from the exhausts.
3. While sleeping, you may accidentally touch the gear shift lever or accelerator and thereby cause an accident.
4. While sleeping in the car with the engine running, You may accidentally step on the accelerator, thereby overheating the engine and exhaust pipe and causing a fire.
Hazardous Materials: Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters in the console box or other spaces. In hot weather, they can explode and cause a fire.
Fire Extinguisher: For safety, we strongly recommend that you have fire extinguisher in your vehicle. Keep it ready for use at any time. Be familiar with how to use it.
When Passing the Intersection or Railway Crossing
When passing the intersection or railway crossing, stop the vehicle to check the safety and drive through carefully. If the vehicle is turned off in the middle of the intersection or railway crossing, get someone to help you and move the vehicle to a safe place quickly.
Do not Switch off the Engine While Driving
Do not switch off the engine while driving. Otherwise, it makes the steering wheel heavier, influence the brake performance and consequently dangerous.
System Safety Mode : The protective measures including illumination of engine warning lamp and reduced engine power are taken (engine turned off in extreme case) when there is a critical fault in the system or a malfunction in the major electrical or fuel system. This indicates the system entering the safety mode to protect the vehicle’s drive system.
•  If the safety mode is activated, pull over and stop the vehicle to a safe location immediately and contact your Authorized Mahindra Service Center. Then drive slowly or have the vehicle towed to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center and have your vehicle checked.
•  If you continue to drive in this state, normal driving is not maintained due to the fixed engine rpm and engine can stop. But even more importantly, continued driving with this state may damage the drive system.
Do Not Modify This Vehicle: If unauthorized modifications are made on the vehicle, the company is not liable for repairing the modified parts even during the term of warranty. Other part problems caused by modification are also not covered.
•  The vehicle you bought is equipped with a large number of precision parts that have passed through countless experiments and tests.
•  These parts are deeply and systematically interwoven. Therefore, if any part is modified or altered without authorization, may under perform or cause critical damage to the vehicle and human life.
Non standardized size number plates should not be used. ADAS functionality will be hampered/misleading.
Protecting Our Environment: As a responsible citizens, all of us have an important role to play in protecting our environment. Judicious vehicle usage and ensuring hazardous waste disposal (including cleaning and lubrication fluids) are important steps towards this initiative.
Body Repairs: If your vehicle is in a collision, contact Authorized Mahindra Service Center to ensure that it is repaired with Mahindra Genuine Parts. Mahindra has collision repair centers that meet strict requirements for training, equipment, quality, and customer satisfaction. Some repair shops and insurance companies might suggest using non-original equipment to save money. However, these parts do not meet Mahindra’s high standards for quality, fit and corrosion resistance. In addition, non-genuine parts or equipment might lead to damages or failures of the vehicle’s systems.
End of Life Disposal
Composition: Vehicle is made from steel, Aluminum, Lead, Copper, Wood, other plastics and miscellaneous parts. These materials are reusable by recycling them through a proper procedure. Some are hazardous to environment and living beings to be disposed as per local pollution board regulations.
Disposal: As batteries are made of lead, lithium and other chemical composites with solvents as electrolyte which are harmful, make impact on environment are to be disposed as per local pollution board regulations. Certain components of this vehicle such as seat belt pre-tensioner, airbag and battery may contain hazardous material. Special handling may be required for service or vehicle end-of-life disposal.
Similarly ABS and other plastic panels, materials used are to be disposed to accredited agencies for recycling.
Most of other materials are reusable, hence components are to be segregated as per their composition as hazardous and non-hazardous, disposed to accredited recycling agencies. Hence it is advised to contact Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further information.
End of life advisable for disposable of product.
For more details:
https://www.mahindra.com/sustainability
https://youtu.be/Q5CMl3VcuNU
1.6 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Plate
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is the legal identity of your vehicle. The vehicle identification number is stamped on the VIN plate riveted on the floor under the driver seat of the vehicle. Flip the cutout provided in the carpet to view the VIN plate.
Graphic
Graphic
1.7 Engine Number
Graphic
Engine Number is punched on the engine crank case adjacent to transaxle on the front side. The engine number is also stamped on the VIN plate.
1.8 Front Overview
Graphic
A
Front Windshield
B
Sunroof*/ Skyroof*
C
Ski Rack
D
Fuel Lid
E
Side Repeater
F
Daytime Running Lamp / Turn Indicator
G
Front Tow Hook
H
Head Lamp High Beam/Low Beam
*if equipped
1.9 Rear Overview
Graphic
A
Turn Lamp
B
Stop Lamp
C
Rear Windshield / Rear Demister
D
High Mounted Stop Lamp
E
Roof Antenna
F
Rear Wiper
G
Tail Lamp
H
Outside Rear View Mirror
I
Reverse Lamp
J
Tail Door Open Switch
K
Reverse Parking Assistance Sensors (RPAS)
L
Rear View Camera*
* if equipped
1.10 Instrument Panel Overview
Graphic
A
Infotainment Screen*
K
Rear ‘C’ Type Charger
B
Steering Controls - LH
L
12V Charger
C
Wiper Control Stalk
M
Rear Ticket Holder
D
Horn / Driver Airbag
N
Rear AC Vents
E
Instrument Cluster
O
Centre Console and Armrest
F
Light Control Stalk
P
Gear Shift Lever
G
Driver Switch Bank
Q
USB Ports
H
Steering Controls - RH
R
Glove Box
I
HVAC Control*
S
Centre Fascia Switches
J
Parking Brake
* if equipped
1.11 ADRENOX Connect
Graphic
The Adrenox connect mobile app provides information in your mobile phone about location and status of the vehicle and allows to control certain vehicle features in a secured way for both Android and iOS platform.
Kindly use the ADRENOX connect mobile app for connected car related features.
1.11.1 KYC (Know Your Customer) Registration
To activate connected car features including access to Adrenox mobile app, KYC process must be completed successfully.
•  Customer must produce valid mobile number, communication address and email ID for KYC registration. for registration purpose.
•  Preferred mobile number entered during the KYC process will be the login for Adrenox mobile app.
•  After successful KYC registration, customer must download the “ADRENOX Connect” mobile application from Google Play store or iOS app store.
1.11.2 Login and Registration
Follow the below steps for Login and Registration:
Graphic
•  You can select sign up option from login page which redirects to sign up page.
•  Then enter registered Mobile number given in KYC form for connected services and click on Generate OTP.
•  OTP with a validity will be sent to the same mobile number.
•  If OTP is not received, you can request the OTP again by clicking on “Resend OTP”.
•  After entering valid OTP, click on “Verify My account”.
•  On successful verification you will be notified with a message “Account Verified”.
•  You will be directed to “Terms and Condition” with “I Agree” option on successful authentication.
1.11.3 Forgot / Change Password and Change Pin
This Feature allows the existing user to change Password and change PIN.
In case user forgets the Password and PIN below flow helps to create PIN and password.
Forgot your password
In case you forget your password:
•  Tap on the Forgot Password? link from login page.
•  In forgot password page, enter the registered mobile number for connected services and click on Generate OTP.
•  Enter the OTP and click on Next button.
•  Enter New Password and Confirm Password and tap on Save button.
Change your password
To Change your password on app if you are already logged in:
•  Tap on the top Left corner from home screen.
•  Click on My Account and select Change Password.
•  Page will open with Old password, New password and Confirm password fields.
•  Fill all the required field and tap on save button.
1.11.4 ADRENOX Connect Features
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
Alerts
Over Speed Alert
When your car exceeds the set speed limit. This speed limit value can be set under alert configuration in mobile application.
High Engine Temperature Alert
Alerts when Engine temperature beyond the predefined limit.
Tyre Pressure Alert
Alerts on excessive/very low and high tyre pressure and navigate to nearby petrol station.
Lamp Status Alert
Alerts when vehicle park lamp left in ON condition while locking the vehicle.
Notifies when the vehicle park lamp is left in ON condition and helps to turn OFF remotely via mobile application.
Vehicle Start / Stop Alert
Notifies when normal vehicle start / stop event is detected.
Door Open Alert
Notifies when any of the doors open while vehicle is moving and also when you trigger for door lock and the door remains open unintentionally.
Geo-Fence Alert
Alerts when your vehicle moves out of a set boundary area.
Helps you to create virtual boundary for any region and will be notified whenever your vehicle moves in or out of that boundary.
Unauthorized Vehicle Entry Alert
Alerts the user when any unauthorized entry in the vehicle is detected.
Low Fuel Alert
Identifies low fuel level and notifies in your mobile application. Helps you to nearby fuel station.
Route Deviation Alert​
Alerts the user when the vehicle deviates from the pre-defined path.
Time Fencing Alert
Notifies you when any movement of vehicle is detected during set time period.
Seat Belt Alert
Notifies you whenever the driver/ co-driver is not wearing the seat belt during vehicle movement in mobile application.
Insurance Expiry​ Alert
Suggests in advance to renew the Insurance as expiry date of Insurance approaches.
Notifies you in advance when the insurance is about to expire.
PUC Expiry​ Alert
Notifies you in advance when the PUC is about to expire.
Engine Idle Alert​
Alerts when engine idling is detected for a set period of time. Time can be configured in mobile application.
Personalized Safety Alert
Alerts the user via a personalized beloved ones voice prompt when the vehicle crosses the speed limit.
PKE / RKE Low Battery Alert
This feature alert’s the user when key battery is low.
Location Based Service
Live Tracking
GPS based vehicle tracking system for tracking vehicle’s location anywhere and at any point of time.
Helps to provide the real time vehicle location when vehicle is in movement.
Helps in sharing the vehicle location for a set time to your family and friends.
Save Route / Save Place
Provision to save a route / place.
Find My Car
Helps to identify the vehicle’s location and directs you to locate your vehicle.
Share My Car Location
Share your car’s location with friends and family.
Push To Car
Allows the user to push routes / location from the mobile app to the vehicle.
Ecosense​
Provides the details about the driving behavior for each trip.
Trip History
Provides detailed information about the trips.
Trip Replay
Provides glimpse of the trip in a form of a short video.
Pit Stops​
Provides information and navigational access to nearby restaurant, ATM, Authorized Mahindra Service Center and so on.
Trip Tagging
Allows user to tag the trips as personal/official.
Restroom Suggestion
Allows user to search and navigate to nearby rest room facilities from Mobile app.
Read Vehicle Status
Check Door Status
Allows the user to view the current status of the vehicle door.
Check Tyre Pressure
Allows the user to view the current status of tyre pressure.
Check Lamp Status
Allows the user to view the current status of the lamp.
Check ODO
Allows the customer to check the odometer of the vehicle.
My SUV Info
Essential information about the vehicle like VIN, Variant and so on.
Check AC Status
Allows the user to view the current status of the AC.
Check Distance to Empty
Helps to check distance to empty range i.e. the distance can be covered with the available fuel.
Seat Belt Status
Helps the user to check the driver / co-driver seat belt is buckled or not.
Safety
E-Call​
In case of accident, Emergency call will be triggered from vehicle, SMS will be sent to M4U and Emergency contacts along with the current vehicle location.
SOS Button
In case of SOS is initiated, SOS call will be triggered from vehicle, SMS will be sent to M4U and Emergency contacts along with the current vehicle location.
Road Side Assistance
Allows the user to reach out for help in case of vehicle breakdown.
Remote Function
Remote Skyroof Control
Allows the user to remotely control Skyroof using mobile app.
Remote Start/ Stop
Allows the user to remotely start or stop the vehicle using mobile app.
Remote Climate Control
Allows the user to remotely configure the in- vehicle temperature during remote start using mobile app.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Provide access to the vehicle by remotely locking and unlocking the doors when vehicle is stationary.
Remote Lamp On/Off​
Allows the user to remotely turn on or off the lamps using mobile app.
Locate My SUV
Allows the user to remotely locate the vehicle by turning on the horn and lights.
Partner Features
Horoscope
Allows the user to view daily fortune as per his/her zodiac sign.
Justdial
Allows the user to search for various services using the Just Dial app in the infotainment.
India Today
Allows the user to browse through news using India Today app in the infotainment.
Weather Update
Allows the user to view weather information using the Accuweather app in the infotainment.
Travel Explorer
Allows the user to search for amusement places and more using the Travel Advisor app in the infotainment.
Ticker Tape
Allows the user to view market shares and trends using Ticker tape app on infotainment.
Others
E-Manual
E-Manual section in mobile apps provides videos with instructions, guidance, or information about AdrenoX features.
In-Home Alexa
Allows the user to check the vehicle status and perform remote function using Alexa (voice commands).
Valet Mode
Allows the user to set the vehicle in a predefined state when giving the vehicle for valet parking. The default PIN to access the Valet mode will be 1234.
Contact Us
Any Query / Enquiry about the product, Get info on Mahindra. Send an Inquiry on any car model. Dealers will get back to the customer on details.
Fuel Diary​
Maintains a systematic log of the all the fuel filling events and provides a clear representation of the fuel filled and the amount spent.
mGreetings
Greetings to the user on special occasions.
Do-Not Disturb
Avoids distraction while driving by not pushing any AdrenoX Connect app notification when mobile is detected in the vehicle.
Journey Planner​
Allows the user to plan a journey by providing some basic information.
Request app Access​
Allows the user to share the vehicle access to two more users.
My Documents​
Storage and retrieval of documents such as Driving license, Insurance, PUC etc.
Profile Manager
Allows the user to connect the mobile app profiles with the vehicle profile thereby providing sync between both.
To-do List
Allows the user to create time based/location- based events that remind the user at the specified time.
Smart Wearables
Allows the user to perform all the read and remote functions through the smart watch (applicable for both Android and iOS).
Pick up Reminder
Allows the user to create an event that reminds the user at the specified time.
Service Booking
Allows the user to schedule a service by directing to the M4U app.
Driver on Call
Allows users to search for nearby drivers availability for hire through Mobile app.
Owners Manual
Allows users to view User manual document on infotainment.
M-Lens
Allows users to scan the tells tales from mobile camera and provides detailed information on the tell-tale function on Mobile app.
Toll Dairy
This Feature helps to check the toll amount for the selected route and toll amount can be recharged via Adrenox App as well. Feature also provides you alert whenever your toll balances goes low.
Personalized Greetings
Personalized welcome message, which will be configurable by the user and he/she will be welcomed with the audio uploaded by them (Ex: Kids voice, Favorite music, Favorite hero dialogues).
Subscription Manager
Allows user to view details of AdrenoX service subscription and enables for renewal of Subscription on Mobile app.
Software Update
Allows user to download and install latest software updates provided by OEM.
Calendar
Allows user to sync calendar from mobile and view the important events on infotainment system.
Manufacturer Update
Allows users to receive announcements made by OEM on Offers, Product launch, Maintenance, etc, on mobile app.
Social Connect
Allows users to share personal experience on vehicle such as Trips, Saved favorite locations on social media platforms such as Whatsapp, twitter etc, through mobile app.
Mahindra Download Manager
Allows users to update partner apps to latest version for seamless experience.
In Car Voice Assist
Allows user to pair and access Alexa voice assistant inside vehicle. Explore Alexa’s services such as Trending events, News, Weather, Navigation, music, etc.
In-home Alexa
Allows the user to check the vehicle status and perform remote function using Alexa (voice commands).
Eco Sense Leader Board
Based on Eco score, Tthe user’s driving pattern will be ranked for Country, State and District wise.
2 SEATS AND SAFETY
2.1 Seats
Sitting in Correct Position
Graphic
Follow the tips below for a comfortable and safe journey:
•  Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine pressed against the seat back.
•  The driver and front passenger seat head restraint has 6 positions. Adjust it as close as possible to the above specified position, with the top of the head restraint even with the top of your head.
•  Maintain at least a 25 cm distance from the centre of the steering wheel to your chest.
•  The top curve of the steering wheel should align with your chin for ideal road visibility.
•  Adjust your seat and seat back angle such that your wrists rest on the steering wheel.
•  Ensure your legs are in a bent position while fully depressing the clutch pedal.
The seat should be adjusted while still maintaining control of the foot pedals (able to fully depress the clutch pedal), steering wheel (rest the wrists on the steering wheel) and your view of the instrument panel controls.
Never adjust the driver’s seat while the vehicle is in motion. The seat movement may be more than expectation and cause the driver to unintentionally operate the accelerator or brake, or turn the steering wheel, causing loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal injury. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is stationary.
Never put objects under the seats. They may interfere with the seat-lock mechanism or unexpectedly activate the seat position adjusting lever, causing the seat to suddenly move, resulting in loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal injury.
While adjusting the seat, do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts. This may lead to injuries.
2.1.1 Front Seat
Front Seat Slide
Graphic
To move the seat forward or backward, pull and hold the seat slide lever up and move the seat to the desired position. Then, release the lever to lock.
While adjusting the seat, make sure the latch engages fully on both side of the fore-aft adjustment track rails and the seat is locked firmly in the desired position. An unlocked seat may move in a sudden stop or collision, causing injury to the person in that seat. Push and pull on the seat to ensure that it is locked.
Front Seat Recline
Graphic
To change the seat back angle, lean forward slightly and raise the lever. Then, lean back to the desired angle and release the lever. After adjusting, make sure the lever is returned to its original position and the seat back is locked.
The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.
If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or the shoulder strap may contact your neck.
The more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of serious injury.
When returning the rear-reclined seat back to its upright position, make sure you support the seat back while operating the lever.
Front Seat Height Adjustment (If Equipped)
Graphic
The driver seat height can be raised or lowered with the help of height adjust handle.
To lower the seat cushion, push the lever down several times.
To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever up several times.
Do not adjust the height of seat while vehicle is in motion.
2.1.2 Rear Seat
Rear Armrest with Cup Holder (If equipped)
Second row bench seat is of 60:40 split configuration and also has a foldable armrest.
Graphic
Graphic
Folding The Rear Seat Back
To fold down the rear seat back:
•  Insert the rear seat belt buckle and belt webbing in the storage to prevent the seat belt from being damaged.
•  Lower the rear head restraints to the lowest position.
Graphic
•  Release the seat back lock by pulling the release lever.
•  When locking the rear seat back into upright position, make sure you hear “click” sound.
When the seat back is released from its holding latch, the seat back can completely be folded. Ensure that none of your body parts are trapped.
Graphic
Graphic
•  Fold the seat toward the front of the vehicle.
•  To use the rear seat, lift and pull the seat back backward. Pull the seat back firmly until it clicks into place. Make sure the seat back is locked in place.
Rear Seat belt Holding Slots
Before folding the rear seats (60P and/or 40P), insert the respective seat belt tongue in the slot available in the rear door pillar. This avoids the seat fabric damages caused by the seat belt tongue during seat folding and unfolding.
Release the seat belt from the slots after seats are unfolded, to be able buckle them for safety of rear passengers.
Graphic
•  Do not fold or unfold the rear seat when the vehicle is moving.
•  Make sure that there is nobody on the folded seat back and in cargo area.
•  If you put sharp or heavy objects on the seat back, there might be some damage to the seat backs or even to the seats.
•  Without completely lowering the second row head restraints or with excessively reclined front seat back, there may be some damage to the head restraints or the centre console if the second row seats are folded.
•  Take care that there are no objects placed on the rear seat cushion before folding the rear seat back down as any sharp features in the object may damage the seat cover.
•  Make sure that your seat is completely locked after adjusting.
•  Any object that might damage the seat should not be placed on the seat.
•  Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in serious head and neck injuries in case of a collision. Make sure that the head restraints are in place and adjusted before driving.
•  Do not recline the seat back more than needed for comfort while vehicle is in motion. The seat belt is the most effective when the passenger sits back and straight up in the seat. If the seat back is reclined too much, then the risks of sliding under the lap belt and getting injured are increased.
•  Do not leave children unattended in parked vehicles. This can cause unexpected accident.
•  You can be hurt by the edges of the mechanism of the seat when trying to get the small objects (cigarette lighters, coins, credit cards) under the seat or caught between the seat and the centre console. Wear protective gloves to prevent injury.
•  Take care not to bother the passenger behind you when adjusting the seat position.
•  Sit upright in the centre of the seat and wear the seat belt properly.
•  Do not place any objects in the path of seat back movement. Any obstruction in this path prevents the seat back from being locked, causing severe injuries or death during a collision.
•  Always raise the seat back to the proper upright position before driving.
•  To avoid unexpected accidents including severe injuries and death, sit in the position so that the distance between the steering wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm, as long as you are comfortable with driving.
•  Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or between the seats. The gas in the lighter container under the seat is potentially flammable when it is released from the container when the seat is moved.
•  Additional cushion between you and the seat cushion reduces the frictional force and could make you slide under the seat belt. This could result in serious injury or death.
•  Do not ride with the seat back reclined too much. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision, which could result in severe injury or death. Also, you cannot be protected by the seat belt and the belt can strangle you or even cut into your stomach. Therefore, sit up straight in your seat by keeping your seat back upright while driving.
•  When returning the seat back to the upright position, hold the seat back with your one hand and pull the release lever with the other hand. The more the seat back is reclined, the greater the restoring force of the seat back is. If you do not hold the seat back while adjusting the seat back, you could be injured by the restoring force.
2.2 Head Restraint
Graphic
The head restraint comprises the padded portion which contacts your head and is inserted/locked in receptacles on the top of the seat back.
Your vehicle seats are equipped with head restraints which are vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of rear collision.
Always align top of the head restraint with the top of your head or as close to it as possible. To lower the head restraint, press the lock knob and push the head restraint down.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up without pressing the release button. To lower the head restraint, press the release button on top of the seat back and push the head restraint down.
Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in serious head and neck injuries in case of a collision.
Do not apply excessive force to the head restraint during adjustment. It may get damaged.
If possible, place the centre line of the head restraint at the passenger’s eye level.
If the passenger is too tall or too short, adjust the head restraints to highest or lowest position.
2.3 Seat Belt
2.3.1 General Warnings and Instructions
At least once each month, inspect the seat belt webbing for any cuts, tears, or other signs of wear (such as fraying along the edges). Also inspect the anchors, retractors, and buckles to be sure they are tight and operational.
•  All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belt no matter how short the trip in order to minimize the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash. In an accident, an un-belted passenger becomes a projectile, and can cause serious injury to himself or another passenger.
•  In a rollover crash, an un-belted person is significantly more likely prone to Injury than a person wearing a seat belt.
•  In order to be properly buckled, you must always sit up straight and keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part must be worn low and tight across your hips, just touching the top of your thighs. While fastening the seat belt, the shoulder strap of the seat belt must pass over your chest and top of your shoulder. It must never touch your neck, face, the side of your shoulder, arm, or pass under your arm. The belt must always be flat against your body and not twisted in any way. Nothing, such as an arm rest, a pocketbook, or any external objects should be between you and the seat belt. Improperly worn of a seat belt will reduce the protection in an accident.
•  Seat belts should be adjusted as tightly as possible, consistent with comfort to properly secure the wearer in the seat.
Graphic
Graphic
•  The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for adults must be properly used and maintained.
•  For usage of adult seat belt to secure children, refer to section of manual for child seat positions and use a child restraint systems.
•  Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is in motion. Passenger who does not wear the seat belts will be under a high risk of thrown against the vehicle inside hard parts, against other occupants or out of the vehicle during emergency stop or collision.
•  Do not use any accessories on seat belts or modify in any way the seat belt system. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
•  An accident or emergency stop, can damage your seat belt system, even if the accident is “minor”. Please have a Authorized Mahindra Service Center inspect the seat belt system after an accident.
•  Please be aware that any unsecured item in your vehicle, such as your pet, unsecured child restraint system, a laptop or mobile phones, can become a projectile in the event of an accident or sudden stop, causing injuries to occupants in the vehicle.
Never use a damaged seat belt system. A damaged seat belt will not provide protection in an accident, resulting in serious injury.
•  Seat belt systems are prone to abuse. They are not indestructible. They must be handled with care to avoid damage.
•  Keep the belts clean and dry. Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and webbings are soiled. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners. These chemicals will severely weaken the belts.
•  Retractors in 3-point type seat belts retract the seat belts when not in use. The inertia lock and coil spring allow the belts to remain comfortable on users during normal driving. During accidents or abrupt stops, inertia locks restrict the sudden forward movement of the wearer.
Seat Belts - Patients: Persons with serious medical conditions should also wear a seat belt. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations before travel.
Seat Belts - Pregnant Women: Pregnant women must also wear seat belts. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations.
Graphic
The lap belt should be worn snugly and as low as possible over the hips. The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder, but never across the stomach area. When worn properly, the seat belt will protect both the mother and the foetus in an accident or emergency stop.
A pregnant woman should never wear the seat belt across the stomach area. This could lead to serious injuries to the foetus and/or the pregnant mother.
Never wear twisted seat belts. Excessive forces will be transferred from the belt to the wearer, in a collision, resulting in serious personal injury.
Each seat belt is meant for use by one person only. Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. The seat belt will not be able to absorb the impact forces properly leading to serious injuries.
Never wear a belt around a child being carried on the occupant’s lap. This could lead to serious injuries.
Seat Belt Usage is Necessary to:
•  Reduce the possibility of being out from your vehicle during an accident.
•  Reduce the possibility of injuries to upper body, lower body and legs during an accident.
•  Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle.
Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the vehicle seat belts. The lap portion should be snug fastened on the hips and as low as possible and the shoulder belt should be rout across the child’s shoulder, not across neck or face. If you are unable to position the belt across the child’s shoulder, the child should be seated in a booster seat. Frequently check the seat belt to be sure it remains snug and in position. A squirming child could cause the seat belt to come out of position.
2.3.2 Seat Belt Configuration
Graphic
To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident, it is highly recommended that the seat belts should be used by all occupants inside of your vehicle.
Seat Belt Types with respect to Location
Seat Location
Seat Belt Type
Driver Seat
Seat belt with Retractor Pretensioner and load limiter (RPLL)
Co-Driver Seat
Seat belt with Retractor Pretensioner and load limiter (RPLL)
2nd Row LH (40P)
Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR) for outboard occupant
2nd Row RH (60P)
Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR) for outboard and center occupant
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR): The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) allows the driver seat belt to freely extend and retract with occupant movement, yet locks the belt during a sudden stop or upon impact.
Retractor Pretensioner and Load Limiter (RPLL): A pretensioner is designed to retract some of the webbing of a seat belt the instant a collision occurs, tightening the seat belt to restrain occupants quickly and reducing the amount they are thrown forward in a moderate or severe frontal crash.
Load limiters help protect occupants from seat belt-inflicted injury. In the event of a crash, the pretensioner restrains the occupant until certain amount of force is applied. At this point the load limiter releases the webbing gradually so as not to exert too much force on the chest of the occupant.
2.3.3 Seat Belt Pretensioner
In the event of a crash being detected, the belt pretensioner locks the seat belt by drawing back the seat belts on the driver’s and passenger’s torso and pelvis to prevent the driver and passenger being thrown forward. The seat belt pretensioner combined with the seat belt and airbag further increases safety.
Graphic
Its activation through Airbag ECU is signalled by pulling down of the metallic cable and removes slack in seat belt.
To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioning device, wear the seat belt on shoulder keeping it firmly close to the chest and bottom part of the seat belt on pelvis.
In case of side impact collisions, front air bags are not inflated, but seat belt pretensioners located in the same position with impact direction will be deployed together with side air bag.
Deployed seat belt pretensioners cannot be deployed again. Have the deployed seat belt pretensioners replaced by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
Operation of pretensioner
Graphic
When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat belt pretensioners pull back the seat belts immediately to restrain the occupants to their seats.
Operation of load limiter
Graphic
After frontal collision, the load limiter releases the seat belt to prevent the occupant from being injured due to belt force.
Fastening the seat belt
Even if seat belts are not worn, the air bag will deploy in case of impact, collision triggered. In addition, airbags can protect occupants when the occupants are wearing their seat belts. Airbags may cause injuries to occupants if they do not wear or inappropriately use their seat belts.
•  Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat belts. If not, the occupants can seriously be injured in a collision or sudden manoeuvring of the vehicle.
•  Sometimes you may have to apply strong force to pull the webbing out of the retract.
•  Each seat belt should be used by only one occupant at a time.
•  Seat belts and airbag’s can significantly minimise possible injury to occupants. But they cannot perfectly protect occupants from fatal collisions or injury.
•  Modifications and improper maintenance for the safety systems could cause serious injury. The safety systems including seat belts should be checked and repaired by only a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
•  An infant or small child should always be restrained in an infant or child restraint.
2.3.4 Fastening the Seat Belt
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Adjust the seat as needed, sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your seat belt, pull the webbing out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. An audible “click” would be heard when the tab locks into the buckle. Pull up on the shoulder strap to tighten the lap belt across your hips. The seat belt retractor will pull in any slack in the shoulder strap. A slow and easy motion will allow the belt to extend and let you move your body around freely.
Periodically check the seat belt as you ride to be sure it remains snug and in position. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock (restrict) if you try to lean forward too quickly.
If the driver or co-driver seat belt is not fastened when the ignition is switched ON, the seat belt warning lamp illuminates and chimes beat will turn till seat belt fastened. Refer “Warning Lamps” in the “Instrument Cluster Features” chapter for further details.
2.3.5 Seat Belt Release
Graphic
To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.
Never insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent from properly latching the tongue and may cause damage to the buckle mechanism, thereby making the seat belt ineffective in an accident, resulting in serious personal injury.
2.3.6 Driver and Passenger Seat Belt Reminder Indication (If Equipped)
Graphic
The driver, front passenger and rear passenger seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will be continuous ON in instrument cluster if driver or passenger doesn’t wear the seat belt and will be continuous until belt is buckled.
Chime will be activated when vehicle speed is more than 25 km/h of speed while vehicle is in motion which will be ON for 95 second for front seat belt and 35 second for rear seat belt.
2.3.7 Passenger Occupant Detection System (PODS) and Seat Belt Reminder Indication
Graphic
Graphic
PODS detects the presence of occupant in the front passenger and on all rear seating locations.
Graphic
If occupant is present on front passenger and rear passenger seats and not wearing the seat belt, seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will glow on the vehicle instrument cluster panel and will be continuous until the seat belt is buckled.
It should be noted that the PODS require a minimum weight hence children may not be detected by PODS. Along with this warning symbol, a chime in cluster will be ON for 95 second for front seat belt reminder and 35 second for rear passenger seat belt reminder.
Do keep in mind that after market seat covers also may deteriorate the occupant detection sensor performance, don’t use the non recommended/non-authorized seat covers.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Seat belt reminder warning lamp for passenger seat may glow in case of child is present in passenger seat.
Strong advice not to carry children in front seat without child restraint seat. Also do not use adult seat belt which is designed to harness person taller than 140 cm. Always ensure Passenger Airbag is turn OFF before you carry child on passenger seat. We strongly urge that children should be in middle row using the child seats with the ISOFIX.
2.3.8 Seat Belt Height Adjuster
Graphic
You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor for maximum comfort and safety of both front seats. If the height of the seat belt is too near your neck, you will not be getting the most effective protection.
The shoulder portion of the belt should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest to the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster to an appropriate position while pressing the height adjuster button. Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into the position.
Adjust the shoulder belt height sitting well back in the seat. Do not adjust the seat belt height while vehicle is in motion.
2.4 Infant and Child Safety
Table of Information on i-Size Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various i-Size Positions
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various Positions
Mass group
Restraint device figure
Front Passenger (With ON/OFF Switch)
Rear out board
Rear Center
Mounting method of Child seat in the vehicle
With Passenger Airbag ON
With Passenger Airbag OFF
Group 0: up to 10 kg (0 to 9 months)
Rear facing child seat
X
U
U
U
Rear facing seat using 3-point belt
Group 0+: up to 13 kg (0 to 2 years)
Rear facing child seat
X
U
U
U
Rear facing seat using 3-point belt
Group I: 9 to 18 kg (9 months to 4 years)
Rear facing/Forward facing child seat
X
U
U
U
Rear facing/Forward facing seat using 3-point belt
Group II: 15 to 25 kg (4 years to 6 years)
Booster seat
UF
U
U
U
Forward facing seat using 3-point belt
Group III: 22 to 36 kg (6 years to 12 years)
Booster seat
UF
U
U
U
Forward facing seat using 3-point belt
U: Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the “semi-universal” categories.
X: Seat position not suitable for children in the mass group.
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various ISOFIX Positions
Mass group
Size Class
Fixture
Vehicle ISOFIX Positions
Front Passenger
Rear Outboard
Rear Center
Carrycot
F
ISO/L1
X
X
X
G
ISO/L2
X
X
X
Group 0 up to 10kg
E
ISO/R1
X
IL
X
Group 0+ up to 13kg
E
ISO/R1
X
IL
X
D
ISO/R2
X
IL
X
C
ISO/R3
X
IL
X
Group I (9 to 18kg)
D
ISO/R2
X
IL
X
C
ISO/R3
X
IL
X
B
ISO/F2
X
IUF/IL
X
B1
ISO/F2X
X
IUF/IL
X
A
ISO/F3
X
IUF/IL
X
Key of letters be inserted in the above table.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group.
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) given in attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.
X: ISOFIX position not suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on i-Size Child Restraint Systems for Installation in Various seating Positions
Restraint device figure
Front Passenger (With ON/OFF Switch)
Rear out board
Rear Center
With Passenger Airbag ON
With Passenger Airbag OFF
i-Size Child Restraint System
X
X
i-U
X
Key of letters be inserted in the above table
i-U: Suitable for i-Size “universal” Child Restraint System forward and rearward facing.
i-UF: Suitable for forward-facing i-Size “universal” Child Restraint System only.
X: Seating position not suitable for i-Size “universal” Child Restraint systems.
Recommended Child Seat to Use in Vehicle: Mahindra & Mahindra recommends Britax DUALFIX PRO M i-Size child seats for up to 18 Kg children. These seats are available at Authorized Mahindra Service Centers.
Mass Group
CRS Manufacturer
Model
Type
Installation in Vehicle
Attachment Method
Group 0  : up to 10 kg (0 to  9 months)
Britax Römer
DUALFIX PRO M
i-Size
Rearward facing
ISOFIX base frame with support leg
Group 0+ : up to 13 kg (0 to 2 years)
Britax Römer
DUALFIX PRO M
i-Size
Rearward facing
ISOFIX base frame with support leg
Group I : 9 to 18 kg (9 months  to  4 years)
Britax Römer
DUALFIX PRO M
i-Size
Rearward facing
ISOFIX base frame with support leg
Anchorage Location
Child restraint anchor fittings are installed at the points as shown in the figure.
Front Side
Rear Side
Graphic
Graphic
Unrestrained infants and small children could be injured:
•  Never transport them unless they are properly restrained.
•  Use restrained system which meet safety standard.
•  Follow directions provided by the manufacturer.
2.4.1 Warning for Child Restraint
•  Use only the officially approved child restraint
Mahindra is not responsible for the personal injury and property damage due to the defect of child restraint.
•  Use only the child restraint with proper type and size for your baby.
•  Use only the child restraint at proper location.
•  Child restraint has 5 categories based on the weight as below:
1
GROUP 0 : 0 ~ 10 kg
4
GROUP II : 15 ~ 25 kg
2
GROUP 0+ : 0 ~ 13 kg
5
GROUP III : 22 ~ 36 kg
3
GROUP I : 9 ~ 18 kg
   
•  Group 0 & 0+ : Rear-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat.
•  Group I : Rear/Forward-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat.
•  Group II & III : Booster seat fitted on the rear seat with seat belt fastened. Always follow the installation and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
Cautions for ISOFIX Seat
•  The rear seat back anchor is the supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint system only with the seatback anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious injury or death.
•  If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and a child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation.
•  Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are latched to the lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound.
•  The child restraint seat strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct seat back anchor.
•  Make sure that the child restraint system is firmly secured by rocking it in different directions.
•  Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unexpected personal injury.
2.5 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) includes airbags, pre-tensioners and ECU. The airbags are designed to provide further protection to the vehicle occupants in addition to the primary protection provided by the seat belts and seat belt pre-tensioners.
The primary components of the system are the sensors which measure the crash severity. In the event of a significant frontal impact, the SRS airbags inflate to work in conjunction with the seat belts and help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s and front passenger’s head/chest.
Seat belts are the primary restraint system in the vehicle. An airbag provides supplemental protection in addition to the seat belts.
All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts to minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash.
Airbags are more effective in reducing injuries when the seat belts are worn.
Airbags
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
Graphic
A
Driver Airbag
B
Front Passenger Airbag
C
Two Side (seat) Impact Airbags (If Equipped)
D
Two Curtain Airbags (If Equipped)
2.5.1 Driver and Front Passenger Airbag
Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (Airbag) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and front passenger seating positions. The indications of the system’s presence are the letters “SRS AIRBAG” embossed on the airbag pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger’s side front panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS is designed to deploy the front airbag only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than ± 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
Driver Airbag
Graphic
Graphic
Front Passenger Airbag
Graphic
Graphic
Front airbag are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front airbag will not deploy in frontal crashes which are below the prescribed deployment threshold where risk of serious injuries is low.
Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag and yourself. It cause injuries.
2.5.2 Side Impact Airbag
Graphic
Your vehicle is equipped with side impact airbag in both the front seats. The purpose of the airbag is to provide the vehicle’s driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection during side impacts or collisions.
Graphic
Graphic
The side impact airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. To minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash, every passenger must always wear their seat belt (see the chapter on Seat Belts in this manual). The airbags inflate very quickly with great force. Do not position any part of your body too close to airbag, you or especially children could be seriously injured/killed by a deploying airbag.
•  In the case of a side collision, the curtain airbag may be deployed together with the relevant side airbag on the side the collision occurs.
•  The side impact airbag is supplementary to the seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore, your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants.
•  For best protection from the side impact airbag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact airbag, all seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver’s hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passengers arms and hands should be placed on their laps.
•  Do not use any accessory seat covers. Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system.
•  Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side impact airbag.
•  Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the air bag and yourself.
•  Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the door and the seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplementary side impact airbag inflates.
Do not cover the front seats with anything. It hinders the air bag inflation.
An airbag is not designed to deploy in every type of crash. Depending on the type of accident or impact, the front airbags independently deploy thereby protecting the occupants. It is not necessary that ALL the airbags deploy during an accident.
2.5.3 Side Curtain Airbag
Side curtain air bags are located along sides of the roof rails on the A and B pillars (contained between right above the front and rear doors till the end of the vehicle roof). They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions. The curtain airbag are designed to deploy depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations, collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations.
Graphic
Graphic
•  In the case of a side collision, the side airbag may be deployed together with the relevant curtain airbag on the side the collision occurs.
•  In order for side and curtain airbag to provide the best protection, both front seat occupants and outboard rear occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belts properly fastened. Importantly, children should sit in a proper child restraint system in the rear seat.
•  When children are seated in the rear outboard seats, they must be seated in the proper child restraint system. Make sure to position the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and secure the child restraint system in a locked position.
•  Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or curtain airbag.
2.5.4 Passenger Airbag Activation/Deactivation
Graphic
A
OFF/Deactivated
B
ON/Activated
The front passenger airbag is disabled (not inflatable) when placing the passenger airbag ON/OFF switch to “OFF” position. This switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel, and you can see it when opening the front passenger door. Press and turn this switch to operate.
Passenger Airbag ON/OFF Indicator
Graphic
Passenger Airbag OFF Indicator
Graphic
This warning indicator glows on center fascia switch on IP when turning the passenger airbag “ON/OFF” switch to “OFF” position to disable the passenger airbag.
Passenger Airbag ON Indicator
Graphic
This warning indicator symbol glows on center fascia switch on IP when selecting the passenger airbag switch to “ON” position to enable the passenger airbag.
2.5.5 Airbag System Malfunction Lamp
Graphic
Airbags do not require any regular maintenance of service. The airbag system malfunction lamp illuminates when the ignition is ON, and it turns OFF after about 2 second. as self check confirming normal operations of airbag system and malfunction lamp.
This lamp monitors airbag sensor assembly, airbag sensors, indicator lamp, seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
If either of the following conditions occur, there is a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioner. Immediately contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
•  The lamp does not glow when the ignition is switched ON or glows beyond six (6) second. after switching the ignition ON.
•  The lamp comes ON at any other time, even briefly
•  The lamp comes ON intermittently
Never make any modifications to your vehicle which could affect the performance of your airbag system. In particular, changes to the vehicle frame, bumpers, bull bar, front fenders, ride height, suspension, seat belts, interior trim, seats or steering wheel (especially covers, pads or other trim), could prevent proper deployment of the airbag. If you need to make any modifications to accommodate any disability you may have, please contact a authorized Mahindra Service Center.
Never try to open or strike the airbag cover. If the airbag cover is cracked or damaged in any way, the airbag may not function as intended. Take the vehicle to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
Even if the airbags do not deploy during an accident, take your vehicle to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for a thorough inspection of the airbag and seat belt systems, no matter how minor the accident. The airbag system could have been damaged, and may not work as intended in the future, resulting in serious injury.
2.5.6 Airbag Inflation/Deployment
The airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. This initiates a chemical reaction which quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas.
Upon deployment, tear seams moulded directly into the pad covers separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags. Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the airbags. A fully inflated airbag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver’s or the passenger’s forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to manoeuvre or operate other controls.
Deployment of the airbags happen in a fraction of a second, producing a loud noise releasing a ‘white smoke’ and residue along with a non-toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue with soap and water as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation. If you can safely exit the vehicle, you should do so immediately.
Airbag deployment may cause windshield to break.
•  Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent them from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or disable the system, which could result in serious injury.
•  Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for several minute after deployment. The airbags inflate only once.
•  Do not cover the steering wheel, instrument panel with any object (e.g. dash panel covers) which may prevent the airbags from inflating properly.
•  Airbags inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can also cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant’s hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment. Sit straight and well back into the seat. Move your seat as far back as practical to allow room for airbag inflation, while still allowing you to properly operate/drive the vehicle.
The front passenger should never sit on the edge of the seat, stand near the glove compartment, rest feet or other parts of the body on the dashboard when the vehicle is moving.
Graphic
The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel or dashboard can be seriously injured during airbag deployment.
•  The driver must sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
•  The front passenger must sit as far back as possible from the dashboard.
•  Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to be shifted too close to a deploying airbag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle resulting in serious injury.
Graphic
Graphic
•  Always sit upright with the seat back in an upright position, on the seat cushion centre with your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on the floor.
•  All vehicle occupants must be properly restrained using the seat belts.
•  All infants and children must be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle in a child restraint seat and be properly restrained by seat belts.
•  Front airbags can injure occupants improperly positioned in the front seats.
•  Even with airbags, improperly belted and un-belted occupants can be severely injured when the airbag inflates. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, airbags and occupant safety contained in this manual.
•  Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system or side impact airbags.
•  Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses.
2.5.7 Child Restraint and Airbag
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
“Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an active airbag in front of it”.
In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.
This is indicated also on stickers that are located at the following position:
•  On the front passenger’s sun visor.
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an active airbag in front of it!
Never hold an infant or child on your lap. The infant or child could be seriously injured in the event of a crash. All infants and children should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat.
2.5.8 Airbag Deployment
Front Airbag
Graphic
Front airbag are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision.
The images shown in this section are for illustrative purpose only. They may not look like your model/variant or vehicle.
2.5.9 Airbag Non-deployment
Impacts below a pre-determined threshold level may not cause the airbag to deploy in the following cases:
Collision with Utility Poles or Trees
Graphic
Airbags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.
Under-ride Situations
Graphic
Running under a truck may not provide the decelerations necessary for airbag deployment.
Airbags will not inflate in this “under-ride” situation where deceleration forces that are detected by sensors are significantly low.
Rear-end Collisions
Graphic
Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, where occupants are moved backward away from the airbags by the force of the impact.
In this case, inflated airbags would not be able to provide any additional benefit.
Frontal Impact
Graphic
Frontal impact beyond 30° range from head-on to the vehicle.
Potholes or Stepped Surfaces
Graphic
Driving into a big pothole, stepped surface or hitting the far side of a hole/incline will not inflate the airbag.
Rollover
Graphic
Airbags will not inflate in rollover accidents where airbag deployment would not provide protection to the occupants.
Frontal Side Swipe Impact
Graphic
Frontal offset impact to the vehicle may not provide the deceleration force necessary for airbag deployment.
In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the airbags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any airbags.
2.6 Airbag Service
Airbag Replacement: Self-servicing or tampering with the airbag system is dangerous. An airbag could accidentally deploy causing serious injuries, or will not deploy when there is a need. Always take your vehicle to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for inspection and repairs.
Removing SRS Related Parts: We do not recommend removing the instrument panel, steering wheel, seats or airbag related parts or sensors by any individual or garages which are not recommended. Airbags could accidentally activate and cause serious injuries, or they may not deploy when there is a need. Visit a Authorized Mahindra Service Center if these parts must be removed.
Airbag Disposal: Improper disposal of an airbag or a vehicle with live airbags can be extremely dangerous. Approach a Authorized Mahindra Service Center to do these jobs.
Airbag Repair: If the front airbag cover or instrument panel airbag cover shows signs of damage or having been removed, the vehicle should be towed to the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for repair. Do not attempt to self repair or reinstall the cover.
Airbag Maintenance: For cleaning the airbag covers/areas, use only a soft dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the airbag covers and proper deployment of the system.
3 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES
3.1 Instrument Cluster Overview
TFT – If Equipped
Graphic
Digital – If Equipped
Graphic
3.1.1 Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the real-time engine speed in thousands of RPM (revolutions per minute). Each division is 500 r/min (TFT), 1 000 r/min (Digital). Operating the engine at very high r/min may lead to excessive engine wear and low fuel economy. Maintain steady engine speed below 2500 r/min and do not accelerate or decelerate abruptly.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Do not over-accelerate the engine during idling, this can cause severe engine damage and would be treated as abuse of the engine which is not covered by warranty.
3.1.2 Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the real-time road surface speed of the vehicle in km/h.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
The vehicle speedometer is affected by size of the tyres used. If the size of the tyres are changed from those fitted at the factory, the speedometer might not display the correct road surface speed and distance travelled.
Over Speed Alert Buzzer
•  Primary level: Buzzer will trigger single chime in every 2 minute when the vehicle speed reaches 80 km/h, once primary level chime is triggered, it will continue playing until speed is reduced to 76 km/h or goes beyond 120 km/h.
•  Secondary level: Buzzer will trigger periodic chime when the vehicle speed reaches 120 km/h and chime will continue playing until vehicle speed is reduced to 114 km/h. Below this speed primary level chime will be triggered and will continue till 76 km/h.
3.1.3 Odometer
The odometer records and displays the total distance travelled in km. Odometer cannot be reset.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
3.1.4 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
The engine coolant temperature gauge functions only when the ignition is switched ON. It indicates the instantaneous engine coolant temperature. The coolant temperature varies with changes in weather, load on engine and driving pattern.
TFT: If gauges is showing 7 or more than 7 bars, it represents that engine is overheating. This will also be notified through blinking or continuously ON Engine high temperature lamp.
Digital: If the gauge moves beyond the normal operating range toward “H” mark. it indicates the engine overheating that may damage the engine. Allow engine to cool. In such situations switch OFF the AC and observe any improvements in the temperature gauge. If not, stop the vehicle and allow the engine to cool down. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir and top-up if required. If the engine is still overheating, contact your nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Never remove the degassing tank cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could splash on to skin/eyes causing severe burns. Wait for the engine to cool down before adding coolant to the reservoir.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine. This will lead to damage of engine components and engine seizure.
3.1.5 Fuel Level Gauge (Petrol/CNG)
The fuel level gauge functions only when the ignition is switched ON.
It gives the status of the fuel level in the fuel tank. F indicates the tank is full, E indicates the tank is empty.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Petrol Mode
When the fuel level reaches the reserve level (approximately 8 liters), only the last bar will be displayed, and the low fuel telltale will turn ON. When the fuel level drops further and the fuel tank is nearly empty, the last bar will disappear from the display, and the low fuel telltale will blink. The amount of fuel required to fill the tank may be less than the specified fuel tank capacity, as a small quantity of reserve fuel always remains in the tank. On inclines or curves, fuel movement inside the tank may cause the fuel level indication to fluctuate, or the last bar may begin flashing earlier than usual. Always check the fuel level when the vehicle is parked on a level road. If the last bar remains off and the low fuel telltale continues to blink even after refueling with a sufficient amount of fuel, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center as soon as possible.
When all the bars in the display starts blinking/flashing, contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center at the earliest.
It is highly recommended to start the fueling at ignition OFF condition and turn on the ignition only when fueling is finished to get correct fuel level.
IGN ON fuel filling may lead to inconsistency and can cause for DTE fluctuation.
CNG Mode
The CNG fuel gauge indicates the quantity of CNG available in the cylinder when the vehicle is operating in CNG mode. F indicates that the cylinder is full (approximately 200 bar), while E indicates that the cylinder is empty. The amount of fuel required to refill the cylinder may be less than the specified cylinder capacity.
If the Low Fuel Warning remains continuously ON and all fuel level bars are blinking, contact the nearest Mahindra Dealer for inspection.
When the Low Fuel Warning Lamp starts blinking, refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.
Always switch OFF the ignition before refueling
CNG and petrol share a common fuel gauge. The corresponding fuel telltale illuminates in white to indicate which fuel's level is currently being displayed on the gauge.
3.1.6 Outside Ambient Temperature
This Screen shows the outside ambient temperature.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Changing the Units (TFT): Once you reach to OAT screen, Long Press the SET switch to change the units. You can choose between °C and °F.
Changing the Units (LCD): Once you reach time and OAT screen, long press set switch to enter into setting mode. In setting mode, temperature will be blinking. Press set switch to change units.
For digital cluster the unit changing is available in infotainment settings.
3.1.7 Gear Recommendation
Gear information shows the actual gear in which user has to drive the vehicle.
Based on the various parameters, it will also suggest to change the gear for better fuel economy with up/down recommendation.
Operating Condition
UP/DOWN arrow along with numeral recommends shifting to that gear.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
3.1.8 Digital Speedo Meter
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Digital speedometer displays the speed of the vehicle numerically.
TFT: It provides immersive experience by having option to switch off the lights of Speedometer and Tachometer.
Turning the lights off : Once you reach to Digital Speedometer screen, Long Press the SET switch to turn the lights OFF. Long press the SET switch to turn ON the lights again.
Note: Digital speed will be displayed in the speedo gauge.
3.1.9 Mood Lighting (If Equipped)
Graphic
Mood lighting is especially designed to enhance your driving experience.
It allows to customize the colour of the inner ring as per your mood.
This ring will also notify you when you are over-speeding (If Equipped). Colour of the ring will change to red.
3.2 Instrument Cluster screen flow
TFT – If Equipped
Graphic
Digital – If Equipped
Graphic
3.2.1 Trip Meter
TFT: Select TRIP A / TRIP B in screen by pressing Trip switch in center console. Long press of set switch will reset trip information, average speed and driving time.
Digital: Select TRIP A / TRIP B available in drive Info menu and can be accessed using UP/Down switch in the steering wheel switch. Trip meter can be reset by long press of OK. Resetting trip will reset average speed and drive time associated with the particular trip.
Variants
Trip A
Trip B
Min
Max
Min
Max
TFT
0
9999.9
0
9999.9
Digital
0
9999.9
0
9999.9
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Trip meter has to be reset whenever battery is disconnected due to various reasons.
Else Average Speed and Driving Time may not match with trip value.
3.2.2 Drive Time
Drive duration is the elapsed time from the start of this trip cycle.
Once drive information is selected, drive duration is displayed on the screen.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
3.2.3 Average Speed
Average speed is calculated based on the total distance covered and time taken from the start of this trip cycle.
TFT: This display can be selected by toggling Trip switch on the center console.
Digital: Average speed is available in drive Info menu and can be accessed using UP/Down switch in the steering wheel switch.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
3.2.4 Clock
TFT
In LCD, select Clock in the screen by pressing Trip switch on the center console.
Graphic
Steps to set time
1. Long press set switch to entering time setting. First digit will be blinking.
2. Short pressing “SET” will change the value one at the time. Long press will change the value to zero.
3. Use trip switch to move to next digit.
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
For high variants, clock and date is in sync with infotainment system. Any change in infotainment will reflect on cluster.
3.2.5 Fuel Computer/Fuel Info
Fuel Computer – TFT : In Fuel computer, Average Fuel Economy (AFE), Distance to Empty (DTE) and Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE) will get displayed in screen.
Select Fuel computer in screen by pressing Trip switch on the center console.
Fuel info – Digital – In Fuel info, Average Fuel Economy (AFE), Distance to Empty (DTE) and Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE) will get displayed in screen.
Fuel info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in steering wheel.
It displays data related to fuel consumption pattern of vehicle.
Use OK button to enter Fuel info page.
Fuel Ratio – Digital
Graphic
Fuel Mode Ratio displays the engine operating time split between Petrol and CNG fuels, indicating the proportion of time the engine runs on each fuel.
Fuel Mode Ratio can be reset by pressing and holding the OK button while the Fuel Mode Ratio screen is displayed.
Distance to Empty (TFT)/Range (Digital)
TFT: This display can be selected by toggling Trip switch on the center console.
Digital Range can be accessed by pressing MENU button in steering wheel.
TFT
Digital – Petrol
Graphic
Graphic
Distance to Empty (DTE)/Range is the approximate distance that can be covered with the available fuel.
DTE is Only Applicable For Petrol.
Average Fuel Efficiency (AFE)
TFT
Once fuel computer is selected, Average Fuel Efficiency is displayed on the screen.
Graphic
AFE is calculated based on the last AFE reset cycle.
Digital
AFE can be reset by long press of OK button in steering wheel.
Digital – Petrol
Digital – CNG
Graphic
Graphic
Additional options to change AFE reset to every ignition ON or after every fuel refill are present in the settings menu.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE) : IFE is calculated based on your current driving pattern. More bars on display means vehicle is consuming less fuel, less number of bars implies it is consuming more fuel.
TFT
Graphic
Digital – Petrol
Digital – CNG
Graphic
Graphic
3.2.6 Vehicle Info (If Equipped)
Vehicle info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
It displays data related to TPMS information.
Use OK button to enter Vehicle info page.
Graphic
3.2.6.1 Tyre Pressure (If Equipped)
Graphic
Tyre pressure is an electronic system designed to monitor the air pressure inside pneumatic tyres.
This system will alert the driver if the tyre pressure falls below the low pressure or raises above high pressure warning limit for any reason. Including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tyre. Tiretronics will continue to alert the driver periodically and will not turn off until the tyre pressure is inflated to the recommended pressure.
Refer Tiretronics topic for more details.
3.2.7 Navigation (If Equipped)
Navigation can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel. It displays data related to map view which is displayed in infotainment. Use OK button to enter Navigation page.
Graphic
Cluster will display the Navigation information Like Turn By Turn Navigation and Full / Partial Map view from Android auto (If available) or native navigation.
Partial Screen Navigation
Turn by Turn Navigation
Graphic
Graphic
To enter full navigation if you are at partial Navigation screen, long press the OK switch to view full map.
Full Screen Navigation
Graphic
To enter partial navigation if you are at Full Navigation screen, long press the OK switch to view partial map.
3.2.8 Display Layout (If Equipped)
Cluster selected Themes:
Graphic
Display Layout can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
Use OK button to enter Display Layout page.
Display layout provides immersive experience by having different skin option based on user choice.
Normal Skin: Default screen.
Information Skin: Cluster shall display all the information with different visual layout.
Minimal Skin: Cluster shall display minimal information which is required for less informative.
Display Layout shortcut: Long press menu button shall enter into display layout directly.
3.2.9 Cluster Setting – TFT
Graphic
Graphic
This allows you to change the settings related to cluster. This screen also comes with a time-out. You have to stop vehicle for changing the settings.
Some setting might not be available as per configuration of the vehicle.
Inside Setting Menu : Long pressing the SET switch will take you inside the settings option. Here you can change illumination, mood ring colour for day and night conditions, also you can enable or disable the welcome chime. Use trip switch to browse through options and set switch to enter sub menus.
Color Setting
•  Scroll through the screens using TRIP switch till you find settings.
•  Long press SET switch to enter settings.
•  Use TRIP switch to browse across the options. Select colour setting using set switch.
Graphic
In colour setting, you can choose from White, Red, Yellow, Sky blue and Blue colour for both day and night conditions.
Illumination Control
Illumination control feature allows you to change the brightness of the Instrument cluster according to light and weather conditions. It automatically detects the day and night conditions according to park lamp input. Also you can customize the illumination setting so that it doesn’t hurt your eyes.It provides 6 level illumination control each for day and night conditions.
Graphic
The default brightness after the B+ power is supplied is level 5.
How to Change Illumination Setting (TFT)
1. Scroll through the screens using TRIP switch till you find settings.
2. Long press SET switch to enter settings.
3. Use TRIP switch to browse across the options. Select “Brightness” option using SET Switch.
Graphic
4. Adjust the Brightness level using SET Switch.
Over speed Flash (If Equipped)
Graphic
When the vehicle speed is higher than the speed configured, the mood ring flashes. Flashing of the mood ring can be turned OFF/ON using this setting.
1. Scroll through the screens using TRIP switch till you find settings.
2. Long press SET switch to enter settings.
3. Use TRIP switch to browse across the options. Select “Over speed Flash” option using SET Switch.
4. Use TRIP switch to browse across the options. Select desired option using SET Switch.
Over speed flash (If Equipped) – Be safe than waiting for the warning to come, someone’s wait might get longer.
Welcome Chime
Graphic
Welcome chime can be enabled/disabled using this setting. If the box is checked means welcome chime is enabled else disabled.
1. Scroll through the screens using TRIP switch till you find settings.
2. Long press SET switch to enter settings.
3. Use TRIP switch to browse across the options. Turn ON/OFF “Welcome Chime” option using SET Switch.
3.2.10 Cluster Setting – Digital
Graphic
Settings can be accessed by pressing MENU switch.
To enter inside settings, press OK.
Use UP / DOWN button to navigate setting features.
Following settings are available:
1. Sound
2. Clock Type
3. Factory Reset
4. TPMS - Auto Learn (If Equipped)
Sound
Turn Indicators, Notifications Sound and Lane Departure Warning (If applicable) are having options to select different sounds and Volume level adjustment.
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Sound Option.
Graphic
3. Press OK to enter Sound Option. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to enter Sound Options.
Graphic
4. Press OK to enter Turn Indicator Tone.
Graphic
4. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select.
Graphic
5. Use Up/Down button to Select the volume Level. Press OK to enter Volume Option.
Graphic
6. Up/Down button to select the volume levels. Press OK to select. Once selected it will return to previous page.
Above procedure is applicable for notification sound and notification volume.
Clock Type
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button. Press OK to enter setting.
Graphic
2. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Clock Type Option. Press OK to enter Clock Type option.
Graphic
3. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select.
Factory Reset
Graphic
1. Navigate to Settings menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Factory Reset Option.
Graphic
3. Press OK to select following screen will appear. Use Down button to select Confirm.
Graphic
4. Press OK to start factory reset process.
1. To go to the main settings screen from any settings menu, use Up/Down buttons to go to the top of the menu screen and press the OK button.
2. In the settings screen, if no option is selected for a long time. The screen will go to the previous displayed screen.
TPMS - Auto Learn (If Equipped)
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to TPMS-Auto Learn Option.
3. Press OK to Enable / Disable the TPMS-Auto Learn Option.
3.2.11 Vehicle Condition Related Warning
Following are the warning information available as per the variant of vehicle.
Display (TFT)
Display (Digital)
Operating Conditions
Graphic
Graphic
This message is displayed when the check engine warning lamp is turned ON or blinking in cluster during ignition ON or engine ON condition.
Graphic
Graphic
When the engine oil pressure warning light is ON and engine has been running.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes on when the ESP system is faulty, and engine has been running.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when cruise mode is turned ON manually using switch.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when cruise mode is turned OFF manually using switch.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when Cruise standby mode is enabled while driving.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when brake fluid level is low and engine has been running.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when vehicle is due for scheduled service.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes on when the Park lamp is ON with the ignition in the “OFF” state.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when passenger airbag switch has been turned OFF.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when low fuel level warning lamp is ON or Blinking.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when either of driver or passenger (if occupied) seat belt is not buckled.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when engine temperature high telltale is ON and engine has been running. Indicates that engine temperature is high.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when you are driving vehicle above 120 km/h.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when you try to move the vehicle when park brake is still engaged.
Graphic
NA
This message comes when you try to change settings while driving the vehicle (i.e, vehicle speed is greater than 2 km/h). This message comes with a time out of 5 second, after that is goes to TRIP A screen through settings screen.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning screen will be displayed if Automatic Light functionality is turned ON.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning screen will be displayed if Automatic Light functionality is turned OFF.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning screen will be displayed if Automatic Wiper functionality is turned ON.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning screen will be displayed if Automatic Wiper functionality is turned OFF.
Graphic
Graphic
This alert is displayed when an ABS related malfunction is detected.
NA
Graphic
This alert is displayed when the Hill Descent Control function is not available because of a malfunction in the system. (If Equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
This alert is displayed when the Hill Hold Control function is not available because of a malfunction in the system.
NA
Graphic
This alert is displayed when EPS related malfunction is detected in engine running condition.
Graphic
Graphic
This alert is displayed whenever turning the on the without pressing the clutch (MT Variants).
3.2.12 Smart Key Alerts
Refer PKE section of the owner’s manual
Display (TFT)
Display (Digital)
Operating Conditions
Graphic
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when key is inside the vehicle and you try to do Passive lock operation.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when vehicle is in cranked or in ignition ON condition, but key is not inside the vehicle.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when start/stop switch stuck for more than 1 minute.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when user need to keep the key in the armrest pocket and then press the start/stop switch to turn ON the vehicle.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when Key Fob battery is Low.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when any door is open and user trying to do passive lock operation.
3.2.13 Steering Lock Alerts (If Equipped)
Display (TFT)
Display (Digital)
Operating Conditions
Graphic
Graphic
This is a temporary malfunction of ESCL and the message is displayed if the vehicle needs to be attempted to start while turning the steering wheel.
Graphic
Graphic
This is a temporary malfunction of ESCL and the message is displayed if the steering column is not locked.
Graphic
Graphic
The message is displayed if the system check-up is required since the ESCL system is malfunctioning.
Graphic
Graphic
This message displays when ESCL learning is required.
3.2.14 CNG Alerts (If Equipped)
Display (TFT)
Display (Digital)
Operating Conditions
Graphic
Graphic
A Fuel Lid Open alert will be displayed when the vehicle's fuel lid is open. The fuel lid must be securely closed before the vehicle can be started.
Graphic
Graphic
A Switch to Petrol alert will be displayed when the vehicle is started in CNG mode for 15 consecutive ignition cycles. If this alert is ignored, after the 20th consecutive CNG start, Then vehicle will be started using petrol, if petrol is not available vehicle will start using CNG in limp home mode with limited power.
Graphic
Graphic
Low CNG alert will be displayed, when the CNG volume in cylinder drops below 21%.
3.2.15 Tyre Direction Monitoring System (TDMS)
Tyre direction monitoring system or TDMS assists you when vehicle has just started and you are about to move the vehicle. It tells you about the current direction in which tyres are aligned at very beginning of manoeuvring the vehicle. TDMS works only when vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged or when vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral and clutch is not engaged.
TFT
DIGITAL
<Level 5>
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
<Level 3>
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
<Level 0>
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Operating Conditions
Tyre alignment is displayed in 6 levels (level 0 to level 5) depending on the alignment degree when the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position from “OFF” position.
Working conditions:
1. When vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged.
2. When vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral and clutch is not engaged.
3.2.16 Steering Mode Control Alerts
Mode
TFT
DIGITAL
Operating Conditions
Comfort
Graphic
Graphic
Warning indicates that current steering mode is set to Comfort. This warning is triggered when user press the Steering Mode Control switch on the center console.
Normal
Graphic
Graphic
Warning indicates that current steering mode is set to Normal. This warning is triggered when user press the Steering Mode Control switch on the center console.
Sport
Graphic
Graphic
Warning indicates that current steering mode is set to Sport. This warning is triggered when user press the Steering Mode Control switch on the center console.
3.2.17 Welcome and Good Bye Screens
Display
Operating conditions
Remarks
TFT
DIGITAL
Graphic
Graphic
Pre-WELCOME sound:
When the driver’s door is opened after the theft deterrent mode is deactivated.
WELCOME sound with logo and multicolored light in mood ring:
When the open driver’s door is closed after the theft deterrent mode is deactivated.
When the ignition is turned on while [WELCOME] is displayed.
- WELCOME sound with logo is activated for the time remaining.
- The screen is changed to System Check screen when the ignition is turned on.
Graphic
When the ignition is turned off. Goodbye comes with animation.
 
Graphic
 
Performs system check once for 3 second when the ignition is turned on.
 
3.2.18 Door Open Alerts
TFT
DIGITAL
Operating Conditions
Graphic
Graphic
Passenger door open
High: With animation
Low: No animation
Graphic
Graphic
Driver door open
High: With animation
Low: No animation
Graphic
Graphic
Hood Open
High/Low: Blinking
Graphic
Graphic
Rear door (LH) open
High: With animation
Low: No animation
Graphic
Graphic
Rear door (RH) open
High: With animation
Low: No animation
Graphic
Graphic
Tailgate open
High/Low: Blinking
3.2.19 Functional Safety Alert
TFT
DIGITAL
 
Graphic
Graphic
Instrument cluster shall monitor some of the internal parameters and if misbehavior found it will enable “Contact Dealer” alert.
Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately when “Contact Dealer” alert displayed in cluster.
For LCD Alert will be displayed for 1 minute.
For TFT Alert will be displayed for 5 second.
3.3 Warning / Telltale Lamps in the Instrument Cluster
TFT
Graphic
Digital
Graphic
Symbol
Warning Lamp/Telltale
Lamp Pre-check
Lamp Status while Engine running
Action/Remarks
Graphic
Left Turn Indicator
No
Slow or Fast Blinking
Indicates left turn lamp is blinking.Slow Blinking: Normal operation.Fast Blinking: One / more left turn lamp bulb has fused. Have the bulb replaced.
Graphic
Right Turn Indicator
No
Slow or Fast Blinking
Indicates right turn lamp is blinking.Slow Blinking: Normal operation.Fast Blinking: One /more right turn lamp bulb has fused. Have the bulb replaced.
Graphic
Parking Lamp
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Parking Lamp is ON.
Graphic
Head Lamp High Beam
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Head lamp high beam is ON.
Graphic
Door Ajar Warning
No
Continuously ON
Indicates one or more doors and/or boot/hood are open.
Graphic
Immobilizer
No
Blinking
Slow Blinking: Vehicle is armed with the remote.Fast Blinking/Continuously ON: Indicates a system malfunction.Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Graphic
Airbag Warning Lamp
Yes
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of the airbag system. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Graphic
Seat Belt Warning
No
Continuously ON
If telltale is not turning OFF even after fastening the seat belt, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.
Graphic
Tiretronics*
Yes
Continuously ON or Blinking
Indicates low/high tyre pressure or possible malfunction in Tiretronics. Refer to Tiretronics section in INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES/WHEELS AND TYRES chapter for further details.
Graphic
Battery Charging System Warning
No
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction in charging system. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.
Graphic
High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
Engine temperature very high. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Graphic
Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning
No
Continuously ON
Telltale will be ON in ignition ON But engine is OFF. In engine ON condition, it indicates engine oil pressure is low. Check oil level and top-up or contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.
Graphic
Engine Stop/Start
Yes
Continuously ON or Blinking
Continuously ON: Engine is in auto stop mode.Blinking: Engine Stop/Start is about to stop the engine.
Graphic
EPS Warning
After Pre-check Continuously ON till Engine Starts
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction on Electronic Power steering system. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Graphic
ABS Warning
Yes
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of the ABS system. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Graphic
HHC Malfunction*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of Hill Hold Control. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Graphic
HDC Malfunction*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of Hill Hold Control. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Graphic
ESP OFF
Yes
Continuously ON
Indicates ESP OFF.
Graphic
ESP Malfunction
Yes
Continuously ON or Blinking
Blinking: Indicates ESP has taken control of the vehicle stability.Continuously ON: Indicates a malfunction in the ESP system. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Graphic
EBD / Low Brake Fluid Telltale / Brake pad worn out*
Yes
Continuously ON
Either one of the below conditions:1. Park Brake might be engaged.2. Brake fluid level might be low.3. There is some concern in EBD. 4. Front Brake Pad wear worn out. Please contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Graphic
Petrol Low Fuel Warning Lamp
No
Continuously ON/ Blinking
Indicates fuel level has reached the reserve level. re-fuel immediately.
Graphic
CNG Low Fuel Warning Lamp
No
Continuously ON/ Blinking
Indicates CNG fuel level has reached the reserve level. Refill the CNG tank immediately.
Graphic
OBD Check
Yes
Continuously ON or Blinking
Telltale will be ON till engine starts. After engine starts, if is still ON there is a potential malfunction related to emission system, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Graphic
Check Engine
Yes
Continuously ON or Blinking
Indicates a potential malfunction in the EMS, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Graphic
Cruise Control Indicator*
Yes
Continuously ON
Indicates vehicle is in cruise mode.
*- If Equipped
3.3.1 Turn Lamps
Graphic
The turn lamp arrows in the instrument cluster flash showing the direction indicated by the turn signals. A sudden increase in the rate of flashing indicates failure of one or more of the lamp bulbs. Have them replaced as soon as possible.
3.3.2 Park Lamp
Graphic
The Park lamp indicator illuminates whenever park lamp is switched ON through combination switch. During ignition OFF, if park lamp is ON with driver door open, buzzer alert will be audible.
3.3.3 Head Lamp High Beam
Graphic
The head lamp high beam telltale illuminates whenever the head lamps are switched ON to high beam or when the head lamp flash is used.
3.3.4 Door Ajar Warning
Graphic
The door ajar warning lamp illuminates when any of the doors including the hood and back door are open during ignition ON. The buzzer chimes when the vehicle speed more than 2 km/h. The lamp and chime goes OFF when all the doors are closed properly.
3.3.5 Immobilizer
Graphic
Immobilizer Lamp flashes intermittently (few second frequency) once the ignition is switched OFF and the vehicle security system is armed (when locked using the RKE/PKE).
Fast blinking indicates a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
3.3.6 Airbag Warning Lamp
Graphic
The airbag warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and tell tale goes off in 3 second. irrespective of engine condition. If the lamp remains ON continuously or flash intermittently, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Following conditions indicate airbag malfunction:
•  Lamp fails to go OFF after engine is started.
•  Lamp does not illuminate at all.
•  Illuminates while driving.
Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately when the airbag warning lamp indicates a system malfunction. The airbag may not deploy when needed, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly or unnecessarily, which may result in personal injury.
3.3.7 Seat Belt Warning
Graphic
The seat belt warning lamp illuminates and the buzzer chimes reminding the driver/co-driver to fasten the seat belt when the ignition is ON. The lamp will continue to illuminate till the driver / co-driver fastens the seat belt properly.
3.3.8 Tiretronics (If Equipped)
Graphic
The Tiretronics lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 second.
System Malfunction: Tiretronics lamp blink for approx. 90 second and then continuous ON.
System Warnings: Tiretronics lamp Continuous ON.
System malfunction: System fail to function normally due to system failure/Sensor failure.
System Warning : indicated Low/High Tyre pressure, High Temperature, Air Leakage.
3.3.9 Battery Charging System Warning Lamp
Graphic
The battery charging system warning lamp illuminates when the battery is not being charged or when there is a malfunction in the alternator.
This lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes out as soon as the engine is started. If the lamp continues to remain ON even after starting the engine, it is an indication that the battery is not being charged or there is a malfunction in the alternator. Check the alternator drive belt for looseness/breakage. If the drive belt is okay, switch OFF all unnecessary electrical equipment and recheck. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance.
3.3.10 High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Graphic
The high engine coolant temperature warning lamp flashes when the coolant temperature is above 110 °C. It starts to flash when the temperature reaches 110 °C and will be continuously ON with buzzer alert when the temperature reaches 114 °C.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine. This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered by the limited warranty.
3.3.11 Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning
Graphic
The low engine oil pressure warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF when the engine is started. If the lamp remains ON even after starting the engine, or illuminates while driving, stop immediately, check the oil level after 2-3 minute. If low, add engine oil to the “MAX” level and check status. If problem persists, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Operating the vehicle with the low oil pressure warning lamp ON could cause sudden unexpected engine failure and loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Do not run the engine with low oil pressure warning indicator ON. This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered by the limited warranty.
3.3.12 Engine Start/Stop
Graphic
The Engine Start/Stop lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 second. The Engine Start/Stop lamp flashes when the vehicle/engine is about to stop through the Engine Start/Stop System. The lamp illuminates continuously when the vehicle/engine has been switched OFF by the Engine Stop/Start System. On restarting the vehicle / engine again by using the clutch/key, the lamp goes out.
3.3.13 EPS Warning
Graphic
The EPS warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and it goes OFF when engine is in running condition after about 3 second The lamp Indicates malfunction on Electric Power steering system. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
When EPS is failed. vehicle can still be driven with increase in steering effort.
3.3.14 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Malfunction
Graphic
The ABS malfunction lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 second If the ABS malfunction lamp continues to remain ON or illuminates while driving (and the brake system warning lamp is OFF), ABS will not operate. But the brake system will still operate conventionally. In this condition, the wheels can lock during severe braking. Have the vehicle checked by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center as soon as possible.
However, if ABS malfunction lamp and brake warning lamp are simultaneously glowing, there is a severe malfunction in the ABS. Operate the vehicle with extreme care and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
3.3.15 Hill Hold Control Malfunction (If Equipped)
Graphic
HHC Malfunction Lamp turn ON if there is any malfunction in hill hold control system of the vehicle.
3.3.16 Hill Descent Control Malfunction (If Equipped)
Graphic
The lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and goes off after about 4 second. Hill Descent Control or HDC malfunction warning lamp indicates malfunction in HDC system. Contact nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
3.3.17 ESP OFF
Graphic
The ESP OFF lamp lluminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 second The ESP OFF lamp illuminates when the ESP has been switched OFF manually.
3.3.18 ESP System Warning
Graphic
The ESP system warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 second. While driving, if the ESP system warning lamp blinks, it indicates that ESP has taken control of the vehicle stability. If the lamp remains ON, it indicates the malfunction in the ESP System. Contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
3.3.19 Parking Brake Indicator (If Equipped)
Graphic
The lamp illuminates when Parking brake is engaged or when brake fluid level is low or there is malfunction in EBD. If the lamp illuminates while driving, do the following:
A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the brake as well as ABS warning lamps.
•  Check if the parking brake/ Electric parking brake is engaged. If yes, disengage it.
•  Check if brake fluid level is low. If yes, top-up brake fluid to the required level.
•  Check if front brake pad is worn out. If yes, replace the front brake pads.
Clean the top of the brake fluid reservoir before removing the cap. Make sure no dirt, impurities or other items fall into the reservoir. Do not leave the cap off for more than a few minute. Any contaminants, impurities or moisture in the brake fluid can affect brake operation, resulting in an accident.
If the brake warning lamp comes ON while driving, the brake system might not be working properly. The pedal might be harder to operate or might go closer to the floor and it can take longer to stop. Pull off the road carefully and stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for checks or repairs.
Driving the vehicle with the brake warning lamp ON or when you suspect brake trouble is very dangerous and could result in serious injuries. Have your vehicle towed to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
When the EBD system is not functioning the vehicle could be unstable during the hard braking. Therefore you must pay attention to the driving conditions while this warning light.
3.3.20 Petrol Low Fuel Warning Lamp
Graphic
When the fuel level in the fuel tank falls below the reserve limit, the low fuel warning lamp is illuminated. Refuel sufficiently and the lamp goes out. If the lamp continues to remain ON even after refuelling, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
3.3.21 CNG Low Fuel Warning Lamp
Graphic
When the CNG level in the CNG tank falls below the reserve limit, the low CNG warning lamp illuminates. Refill the CNG tank sufficiently and the lamp goes out. If the lamp continues to remain ON even after refuelling, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
3.3.22 OBD Check Lamp
Graphic
The OBD check lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and remains ON till the engine is started indicating normal status. If the lamp remains ON, it indicates a potential malfunction.
There may be a malfunction in:
•  The fuel management system
•  The emission control system
•  Systems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
3.3.23 Check Engine
Graphic
The check engine lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes out in 3 second indicating normal status. The lamp blinks or illuminates continuously if there is a fault in the engine management system. Switch OFF the engine immediately. Contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for necessary repairs.
3.3.24 Cruise Indicator (If Equipped)
Graphic
The cruise control lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes off in about 3 second indicating normal status. The lamp blinks if the accelerator is depressed, while in cruise mode.
When SET+ button in the steering wheel is pressed, cruise control is activated and the lamp illuminates indicating the vehicle is in cruise mode.
When CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel is pressed, the cruise mode is deactivated and the lamp goes OFF indicating that the vehicle is not in cruise mode.
If the lamp does not illuminate when the vehicle is in cruise mode or does not go OFF when the vehicle is out of cruise mode, there is a possible malfunction in the lamp or the cruise control system. Have the vehicle checked by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
4 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your Vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control system which are as follows.
1. Crankcase emission control system
2. Evaporative emission control system
3. Exhaust emission control system
To ensure optimal functioning of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your vehicle inspected and maintained by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
4.1 For Petrol vehicles
It is a highly effective system that controls exhaust emissions from an engine. It is crucial for meeting emission standards specified by law.
Your vehicle is equipped with a three-way catalytic converter (TWC) for meeting BS VI emission norms.
For optimal functioning of the emission control system, it is mandatory to get your vehicle inspected and maintained by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center. The maintenance schedule in owner’s manual should be followed.In addition, it is important to use the correct grade of fuel, confirming IS 2796:2017 BS VI specification.
4.1.1 Three-Way Catalytic Converter (TWC)
It is an exhaust after treatment component that is designed to convert carbon monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC), nitrogen oxides (NOx) into carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N) and water (H2O).
4.1.2 Gasoline Particulate Filter (GPF) (If Applicable)
Gasoline particulate filter (GPF) is an integral part of the vehicle exhaust gas emission reduction systems, and it  removes the soot (Particulate matter) from the exhaust gas. Unlike a disposable air filter, the GPF is a regenerative filter. Regeneration is triggered automatically according to vehicle driving conditions which burns the accumulated particles/soot from the GPF. The process is called as GPF Passive Regeneration
Graphic
In case of any GPF systems failure, OBD MIL lamp turns ON. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance.
Recommended Fuel
•  Use E20 (20 percent mixture of Ethanol in Motor Gasoline) confirming to IS 17021 specification or E10 (10 percent mixture of Ethanol in Motor Gasoline) confirming to IS 2796 specification having RON 95. Information regarding the fuel quality shall be available with the concerned fuel retail outlet.
•  Usage of lower octane may result in engine knocking. Avoid filling any other grade of fuel or kerosene. Do not add any additives which are not recommended by us. These actions will void the emission warranty of your vehicle and can cause permanent damage to the engine and emission control systems.
•  Persistent usage of Lower Octane Fuel will create a risk of damage to Engine and Exhaust System.
•  Refill with Petrol of recommended Octane Number as early as possible.
5 INFOTAINMENT - TYPE 1 (IF EQUIPPED)
5.1 Safety Precautions
Before using this device, take some time to read through this Instructions Manual.
Knowledge of the operation procedures will help in getting the best performance out of your new Infotainment System. Figures from the display and panel presented in this manual are examples provided for best explaining how the commands are used. Thus, display figures presented may be different from those actually presented on the device display. Illustrations, technical in­formation, specifications and descriptions of this brochure were correct until the date of printing. We safeguard the right to make any required amendments according to the ongoing development and improvement.
To avoid risk of damage and/or fire, observe the following precautions;
•  To avoid short-circuits, never insert metallic objects (for instance: coins or metallic tools) into the unit.
•  If you notice that the unit is releasing smoke or strange smell, promptly disconnect the supply and consult the nearest or Mahindra service Center.
•  Pay attention not to let the unit fall down, and neither beat the device strongly. Internal glass components of the unit may be damaged, making it non-operative.
•  This system has a Capacitive type touch panel. Select the desired option in the screen using his / her finger. Do not use any sharp objects on the touch screen. On selection the selected item is highlighted as an acknowledgement.
5.2 Cleaning of the Unit
If the front panel of this unit is dirty, clean it with a dry cloth or slightly soaked in water. If the front panel is too dirty, clean it with a cloth moistened with neutral soap and then repeat the prior operation.
Do not use any cleansing spray with this unit, as that can affect its mechanical parts. If you clean the front panel with a rough cloth that may scratch the surface.
Features described herein are subjected to availability depending on vehicle variants. Please contact authorized personal for more information.
5.3 User Controls
5.3.1 Touch Screen Display
The Infotainment system is equipped with a touch screen TFT display.
It displays information about Media (AM/FM, USB, Bluetooth music & etc.,), Vehicle controls & settings
Graphic
5.3.2 Bezel Buttons
The bezel input keys are located below the infotainment system screen on the dashboard to provide quick access to frequently used functions to the driver/ passenger.
Graphic
A: Favourite Screen Button
E: Volume Knob
B: Setting Button
F: Phone Button
C:Radio Button
G: Media Button
D: Mute/Power Button
H: Home Button
5.3.3 Steering Wheel Control (SWC)
Infotainment system can be controlled by Steering wheel switch mounted on the left side of the steering wheel.
Graphic
A: Mute
E: Voice Command
B: Volume +
F: Up
C: Volume -
G: Down
D: Call Connect
H: Call Disconnect
•  Mute - Press MUTE button to mute audio while in TUNER mode and pause the song while in USB mode.
•  Volume Control - Press ‘+’ and ‘- button to increase or decrease the volume.
•  Call Connect - Press to accept incoming call to the paired BT phone.
•  Voice Command – Android Auto / CarPlay and some vehicle functions can be controlled using voice command
•  Source - Press Source button to toggle between Tuner, USB, BT Audio and My Drive.
•  USB Mode - Press the seek button 'Up' / 'Down' moves to next / previous track of MP3 and video playing.
•  Tuner Mode - Press the seek 'Up' / 'Down' button briefly: Manual Search, moves to selected channel. Press and hold the seek button 'UP' / 'DOWN' for 2 seconds to AUTO Search.
•  Call Disconnect - Press to reject or end active call to the paired BT phone.
•  Call Disconnect - Press to activate Alexa or OK Google or Siri voice assistant.
This provide the flexibility of controlling the infotainment system while driving, without any distraction
5.4 Landing Screen Overview
5.4.1 Home screen
Home Screen is the main screen for the user to interact with the Infotainment System
Home Screen shows all the media, phone, navigation and applications.
•  Home Screen will be displayed on pressing the Home icon or Home button
•  It also allows the user to have split screen menus.
•  The tiles in the XUV 3XO CNG screen can be rearranged based on the user preference
Graphic
•  Features which are available in infotainment screen is known as Tile.
The Tiles in home screen are as follow
1. Radio Tile
2. Phone Tile
3. Music Tile
4. Navigation Tile
5. Applications Tile
5.4.2 Radio Tile
•  The Radio tile allows quick access to radio features and the Radio menu.
•  Tap on the radio tile to open the full screen Radio player.
•  When Radio is playing, station name & frequency will be shown in Radio Tile
Graphic
•  User can set favourite FM channels by using favourite icon.
Graphic
Shortcut icon in Radio: Shortcut icon in Radio tile is used to
Change previous radio station.
Graphic
Shortcut icon in Radio tile is used to Change next radio station.
Graphic
This option is used to mute / unmute the music
Graphic
5.4.3 Music Tile
•  Tap on Music tile to open media player for playing the desired music
•  Current playing audio name will be displayed in the tile
Graphic
•  To change a song, press the next/ previous buttons.
•  To pause music, press pause button
•  Music can be played from various sources like USB, My Drive, iPod and Bluetooth.
Graphic
Shortcut icon in Music Tile: Shortcut icon in music tile is used to Change next audio track.
Graphic
Shortcut icon in music tile is used to Change Previous audio track.
Graphic
Stop button is used to stop/play the music
Graphic
5.4.4 Phone Tile
•  The phone tile shows the details of the phone that is currently connected with Bluetooth.
•  If no phone is currently paired, it will give a quick option to go to the device pairing screen in the settings menu.
•  Connected device name will be displayed at the bottom of the phone tile.
•  Tap on the Phone tile to enter phone screen.
Graphic
After opening the phone application below features can be accessed.
Recent call list:
It displays the recent call list from the user’s connected mobile device.
Graphic
Contact Details:
Contacts displays a list of available contacts from the user’s mobile device.
Graphic
Dial:
The dialpad can be used to manually dial phone numbers.
Graphic
SMS:
SMS messages received on the user’s mobile device will be displayed under the SMS tab.
Graphic
Quick Dial:
Favorites contacts can be seen in quick dial
Graphic
Shortcut icon in Phone Tile:
Recent shortcut opens up the Recent call history of the connected device
Graphic
Device shortcut opens up the infotainment connected device list
Graphic
Contact shortcut opens up the connected devices conatcts
Graphic
5.4.6 Application Tile
Applications tile allows the user to open app drawer and access all the available applications.
Tap on the Applications tile to open the app drawer.
It has quick options to open News, Music & weather apps.
Graphic
Graphic
5.5 Widget
Widgets will provide quick information to the user, and it will be available in left corner of the Home screen.
Graphic
•  The widgets display will be fixed in the left corner of the home screen.
•  The following information will be available as part of widgets
1
Clock
4
NEWS
2
Gallery
5
Travel Explorer
3
Weather
6
Calendar
5.5.1 Clock Widget
•  Clock widget displays Time in selected type.
•  Tap on the clock widget to open settings to change the clock type.
Graphic
Graphic
5.5.3 Weather Widget
•  Weather Widget displays weather information based on vehicles location
•  Tap on the weather widget to open weather application
Graphic
Graphic
5.5.4 Calender Widget
•  Calendar Widget displays available calender events
•  Tap on calender widget to open calender application and fix the Events, Journey Planner, Checklist, Schedule Destination & Pickup Remainder
Graphic
5.6 Split Screen Functionality
Users can access the Split screen by swiping left on the home screen.
Graphic
User can set the Radio, Media, Phones, and other screens by long pressing the intended tile in Split screen.
Graphic
Graphic
5.7 e-SIM (If Equipped)
XUV 3XO CNG infotainment has inbuilt e-SIM which is used to access Just dial, Accuweather, Horoscope, News, and some other apps can be accessed by using the e-SIM
XUV 3XO CNG is applicable for a free AdrenoX subscription starting from the date of KYC till a specified period based on vehicle variant.
Graphic
5.8 Quick Access Drawer Functionality
Graphic
Graphic
Quick Access Drawer can be opened by swiping down the screen.
Quick Access Drawer gives the user a swift way to access handy features like Volume control, SOS, Roadside Assistance, Valet Mode, Notifications, Help, Radio, My Drive, USB, Bluetooth, iPod, and video.
5.8.1 Volume Control
User can increase, decrease or mute the volume by using Volume Control slider 
Graphic
5.8.2 SOS
If there is any emergency, user can access the SOS
By enabling SOS in infotainment, a call will be triggered automatically from your XUV 3XO CNG to 108 Ambulance Services for Medical Assistance
Graphic
5.8.3 Ask Mahindra
Ask Mahindra is available in the quick access drawer. It can be accessed by swiping down the Infotainment.
Click on the Ask Mahindra icon.
Graphic
After clicking on the icon, a call is triggered from the vehicle to the dedicated Mahindra Support Center via E-SIM.
A customer care agent will be assigned to the Ask Mahindra call.
User can use Ask Mahindra for guidance or assistance on using the features available in the vehicle, nearby workshops, roadside assistance, etc.
Some Infotainment features may not work while the Ask Mahindra call is in progress.
5.8.4 RSA
If any abnormal condition is observed in vehicle, user can access RSA.
By enabling RSA in infotainment, a call will be triggered automatically to Mahindra Roadside Assistance team.
Graphic
5.8.5 Valet Mode
Valet mode can be enabled while giving the vehicle to valet parking. The default PIN to access the Valet mode will be 1234.
Graphic
Once the Valet Mode is enabled,
•  Infotainment screen will not be accessible,
•  The vehicle speed will not go beyond 80 Km/h,
•  Geofencing alert will be triggered to the user's mobile when an unknown person drives the vehicle over 5 km.
•  Above conditions are not applicable, if user disables the valet mode.
•  Don’t activate the valet mode during vehicle service
5.8.6 Notification
•  Notification received in connected mobile will be shown by clicking the notification.
•  User mobile should pair with XUV 3XO CNG via Bluetooth for this function to work.
Graphic
5.8.7 Help
•  Using Help option user can know the unknown alerts and telltale details in Owners Manual or Infotainment Manual
Graphic
Graphic
5.8.8 Radio icon
•  On tapping radio icon radio app will be opened
Graphic
Graphic
5.8.9 Apple Carplay icon
It opens media player with source as Apple CarPlay.
Graphic
5.8.10 Android Auto icon
It opens media player with source as Android Auto.
Graphic
5.8.11 MyDrive icon
By using USB device, favorite songs can be stored in MyDrive
It opens media player with source as MyDrive.
Graphic
5.8.12 USB icon
It opens media player with source as USB device.
Graphic
Graphic
5.8.13 Bluetooth icon
It opens media player with source as Bluetooth.
Graphic
5.8.14 iPod
This option can be enabled only if the user have iPhone
Graphic
If user have iPhone, then car play application can be disabled through iPhone settings. To play the music, connect the USB cable to media port and play songs through mobile APP.
Graphic
5.8.15 Video
•  When USB device is connected in Media Port, then user can play Videos.
Graphic
Graphic
•  User can see the video in parking condition
•  During driving, user can see the video in infotainment up to 20 km/h speed
5.9 App Drawer Functionality
The App Drawer can be opened by dragging the screen from Down to up.
Graphic
The app drawer displays all the applications available in Infotainment System.
Graphic
The App Drawer allows user to browse through available apps and folders and launch selected one.
5.9.1 Add Folder
•  User can select add folder and can drag the existing apps available in app drawer to New Folder
Graphic
•  User can rename the folder as per choice.
Graphic
5.9.2 Climate Control (If Equipped)
•  User can press Climate Control option and select different modes available in XUV 3XO CNG.
Graphic
Graphic
•  Types of modes are described as Following
Face Mode: User can access Face mode to get direct airflow through instrument panel air vents to the front row passenger.
Graphic
Face & Foot Mode: User can select Face & Foot mode to get airflow from both instrument panel air vents and footwell air vents
Graphic
Foot Mode: User can select Foot mode to get airflow from footwell air vents
Graphic
Foot & Defogger Mode: User can select Foot & Defogger mode to get airflow from footwell air vents & Defogger vents
Defogger vent is used to clear the frost/mist, which is formed on Front windshield.
Graphic
Front Defogger Mode: User can select Front Defogger mode to clear the frost/mist, which is formed on front windshield
Graphic
Recirculation Mode: User can select Re-circulation mode by pressing the Recirculation mode icon.
Graphic
In re-circulation mode, air is re-circulated in passenger compartment If it is OFF, fresh air is supplied in passenger compartment.
Blower Speed Control: Blower Fan Speed can be controlled by pressing '+' or '-' button on HVAC controller.
Graphic
Auto Mode: User can select auto mode by pressing the ‘Auto’ button on HVAC controller.
Graphic
In AUTO mode, with respect to the surrounding condition, set temperature is automatically obtained. This is done by adjusting the blower speed and fresh/recirculation mode to optimum level.
Power Off:
HVAC system is turned off when the user presses the power button.
Graphic
Graphic
Press the power button to restart the HVAC system
5.9.3 Connected Apps (If Equipped)
User can select Connected Apps and can access various connected apps Features.
Graphic
5.9.4 Documents
User can store the important files like License, Aadhar card, Pan card, Voter I’d , etc., in digital format
Graphic
1. My Drive Documents: In this folder user can store the important details like License, Aadhar Card, Pan Card, etc.. in digital format.
Graphic
2. USB Documents: Connect the pen drive in file transfer socket and then user can access important files which are available in pen drive.
Graphic
5.9.5 Download Manager
In Download Manager, user can install and update the applications available in the Infotainment Systems
User can select the required App and view various details available in it.
Graphic
5.9.7 MyDrive Manager
Insert USB device in Media Port & open the My Drive Manager then user can copy required songs, videos, photos and documents to the infotainment system
Graphic
Select required file from USB device & by using copy (highlighted) option, user can store the required details from USB to the infotainment system.
Delete content option is used to remove the unwanted files in the infotainment system
Graphic
User can store max 1.9 GB data in infotainment system.
Graphic
5.9.8 My SUV Info
In MySUV Info option, user can know the Vehicle Details and can store License & other certificates in digital format.
Graphic
Vehicle Details
Graphic
1. Vehicle Name
7. Number of cylinders
2. Color of the vehicle
8. Variant details
3. PUC (Pollution Under Control) Expiry Date
9. VIN Number
4. Last Service Date
10. Model
5. Engine Capacity
11. Make
6. Fuel Type
12. Insurance Expiry Date
My Documents:
In My Documents user can store the following details in digital format
1. Insurance
3. Registration Certificate (RC)
2.License
4. Pollution Under Control (PUC) certificates
Graphic
5.9.9 Owner’s Manual
By using Owner’s Manual option, user can see XUV 3XO CNG Owner's manual & Infotainment manual.
Graphic
Graphic
5.9.10 Software Update
User can find whether the software is latest or not by using following option.
Graphic
Graphic
5.9.11 User Profile
It is a personalized profile and user can choose this option to control climate setting, preferred audio source, audio settings, application drawer, link profile to key fob, Lock my Profile etc.
Graphic
User Profile
In the given screen user have two user profile and one guest profile.
Graphic
Configure Active Profile
User can assign person specific settings for First, Second and Guest Profiles.
Graphic
Name
User can create a distinct identity to the profile by providing a unique name.
Graphic
Audio Source
User can choose the preferred audio source for the profile. When preferred audio source is not available, default audio source will be played.
Graphic
Audio Settings
User can be able to assign the favorite audio settings to the profile.
Graphic
Screen Saver
By using screen saver option, user can select the photos from gallery & make it Screen Saver.
By selecting automatic screen saver, screens can be updated automatically by M&M
Graphic
Application Drawer
In Application Drawer user can fix the apps according to the profile usage
Graphic
Link Profile To Key Fob
User can link the profile with the key fob. By using this setting, once user enter the vehicle with the desired key fob, then all the saved settings will updated automatically.
Graphic
Lock My Profile
If lock settings is enabled by the user, then other user can’t change the saved details. Also, other user can't see the saved user specific settings on infotainment screen.
Graphic
5.10 Settings
Infotainment and some vehicle functions can be controlled using the setting
Following settings are available in XUV 3XO CNG
1. Quick settings
2. General settings
3. Display settings
4. Date and time settings
5. Audio settings
6. Phone settings
7. Vehicle settings
8. User input & feedback settings
9. Wi-Fi settings
5.10.1 Quick Settings
Some settings, which are needed frequently are provided up-front as Quick Settings on Infotainment Screen.
Graphic
Graphic
Touch Sound
Enabling the Touch Sound will provide audio feedback whenever user selects icon or app in infotainment screen
Graphic
Clock In System OFF
In Home Screen, user can turn ON / OFF the display of Clock by using this option.
Graphic
Reset Home Layout
Home screen will revert to its default layout whenever user selects this option.
Graphic
Graphic
5.10.2 General Setting
Graphic
By using General, users can perform the following functions:
1. Unit
2. Factory Reset
3. Software Update
1. Units: The user can choose between UK (Metric) and US (Imperial) to display various values like speed, distance, etc.
Graphic
2. Factory Reset: Factory reset can be used to revert all the Infotainment settings to their default values.
If user select 'Confirm', All settings will be restored to default factory settings.
Graphic
3. Software Update : Users can access software updates for their vehicle in this section.
Auto Download Updates allows automatically download the latest software or system updates without requiring manual intervention from the user.
Graphic
5.10.3 Display Setting
Graphic
Brightness:
The infotainment and instrument cluster brightness can be adjusted individually according to the user’s preference.
Graphic
Graphic
Power and Sleep
•  Show clock when Infotainment system power OFF: If this is enabled, then the clock will be displayed in Infotainment screen whenever Infotainment system gets OFF.
•  If Display is inactive for 60 second show Screensaver: If this option is enabled a screensaver will be displayed whenever display is inactive for 60 second.
•  User can manually select the screen saver photos from My Drive Photos.
Graphic
Clock Type
•  User can select between digital or analog clock display as per their choice.
Graphic
Home Layout
•  In Home Layout, user can have the screen view as per choice.
•  If user wants to revert back to default layout, it can be done through this option.
Graphic
5.10.4 Date and Time Setting
Users can set the date and time manually according to their preferences.
Graphic
Sync to GPS:
Date and Time can be synced with GPS, it can be manually enabled or disabled by user.
Graphic
Time Zone
By using this option user can manually fix the different time zones.
Graphic
Set Date
User can fix the Date format either in DD/MM/YY or MM/ DD/YY format.
Graphic
Set Time
The user can switch between 24-hour and 12-hour clock formats.
Graphic
5.10.5 Audio Setting
Using Audio Settings, user can change the sound effects in different positions.
Graphic
DTS (If equipped)
1. Stage
Stage mode is just like watching the musician's performance at stage, audio originates from front speakers and travels to the rear seats.
Graphic
2. Studio
Enhances sound clarity and creates a wider, more immersive soundstage, making music feel like it is being played in a professional recording studio.
Graphic
Sound Field Position
User can adjust the sound according to his preferences and button center is given to get the sound balance from back to center
Graphic
Equalizer
•  Equalizer allows the user to balance Bass, Mid, Treble settings.
•  In addition to this, the subwoofer volume can also be controlled using it.
Graphic
Speed Dependent Volume Control (SDVC)
Speed Dependent Volume Control will automatically adjust the loudness and quality of the music according to speed of the vehicle by removing the road noise.
Graphic
Sound Experience
Studio Mode
Graphic
Higher and Wider sound stage just like watching the musician's performance at the first-row seat
One big sound stage for all occupants
Sonic Expanse
Graphic
Ambiance
Graphic
Stage: Higher and Wider sound stage just like watching the musician's performance at the first-row seat. One big sound stage for all occupants
Party : Just like Disco Club, music will come from multi direction without sound stage (music will come from particular distance) NO sound image localization (user can feel the special instruments like guitar, keyboard, etc.,)
Volume Settings
User can increase or decrease the volume for the Voice recognition (Alexa & Google Assistance), Notification, Phones, Media.
Graphic
Default Sound Settings
By enabling the default sound settings, the Sound settings will be restored to the default settings.
Graphic
VNC++
VNC++ will automatically adjust the loudness to maintain tonal balance against road noise
Graphic
Bass Enhancer
Bass Enhancer enhances the low frequencies for a heavier & punchier bass effect and make the system more exciting.
Graphic
5.10.6 Phone Setting
By using the Phone option, users can perform the following function
Graphic
I) Bluetooth : User can enable or disable Bluetooth connection according to their need.
Graphic
II)Device List: User can view the list of devices, already connected to vehicle infotainment.
Graphic
III)Add Devices: By using this option, user can find and add nearby devices.
Graphic
IV)Ring Tone: User can fix the ringtones for incoming calls
Graphic
V) BT Discoverability: When BT Discoverability option is pressed, vehicle's Bluetooth will be shown to nearby devices for 90 second.
Once any mobile device is connected, Bluetooth functionalities will be available
Graphic
VI) SMS Settings: SMS settings in the infotainment system include configuring text message notifications, display preferences, and handling incoming messages for an enhanced user experience.
Graphic
5.10.7 Vehicle Setting (If Equipped)
By using the Vehicle option, users can perform the following functions.
Graphic
Access
User can see following features on XUV 3XO CNG by using access option.
Selection Unlock: While activating this option only the driver door can be unlocked
Service Mode: Should activate this while providing vehicle for Service
Graphic
Light & Illumination
Daytime Running Lamp: By enabling this option DRL will be activated automatically in ignition ON for better visibility
Auto Dimming IRVM: By using this option IRVM auto dimming function can be turned ON/OFF.
Graphic
5.10.8 User Input & Feedback Setting
By using the User Input & Feedback option, user scan perform the following function
Graphic
Screen Touch Feedback
Button Touch Sound: By enabling this user can hear the touch sound while selecting any application
Graphic
Voice Alerts
Voice Alerts: By enabling this, system give voice commands to user (like Welcome, goodbye, etc.,) Alerts should be configured through Adrenox application
Graphic
5.10.9 Wi-Fi Setting
User can connect their mobile device with vehicle Wi-Fi
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
By using Wi-fi device option, user can know the name of vehicle Wi-Fi and can change the password of the Wi-fi.
5.11 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
1. How to connect phone via Bluetooth in Infotainment?
User can connect Bluetooth using any of the below methods, in Bluetooth settings. Add device: Kindly ensure, Mobile device should be in Bluetooth settings screen to accept the connection Bluetooth discoverability: Kindly ensure, Mobile device start scan after discoverability is turned On
2. My contacts are taking time to load in IVI?
Based on the Mobile device and number of contacts, loading time may vary from few seconds to few minutes
3. Bluetooth Music is not playing in Infotainment?
After connecting mobile device to Bluetooth, user need to select his device for media in device list and then select Bluetooth music source in Infotainment to Play music
4. Few Phone Contacts are not visible in Infotainment Screen?
Ensure that your phone book contacts do not have special characters before their name. If there are such contacts, please rename them.
5. I can’t Accept or decline WhatsApp call from IVI?
IVI will support Bluetooth phone voice call and supportability of WhatsApp, MS Team call depends on the controls provided by Mobile device/app to Infotainment
6. During active call, I’m getting Navigation Prompts?
During call, Navigation prompts will still come so user don’t miss any direction. User can adjust the volume of navigation prompts as required
7. Next /Previous, fast forward/rewind etc. controls not working for Bluetooth music?
The availability of the features/control is dependent on the Bluetooth version of phone device and music application used in phone
8. While playing USB song album art not displaying?
Album art will display in the screen, only if the song has album art information
9. While playing songs from USB, few files are getting skipped?
If the Infotainment system comes across a corrupt music track in media source, the system might skip to next music track in the media source
10. Date & Time in my Infotainment is Incorrect?
User can Sync to GPS or manually set Date & time in settings. After selecting Sync to GPS, need to drive vehicle few Kms in open sky to ensure proper date and time based on the time zone selected.
11. Sources are disabled in QAD?
Source will be active only when device is connected e. g., for USB, Pen drive should be connected.
12. Can I reduce the Navigation Volume?
Yes, user can adjust Navigation or other source volume, in Audio Settings
5.12 Appendix
Abbreviations
Acronym
Description
BT
Blue tooth
SWC
Steering Wheel control
IVI
In Vehicle Infotainment
6 INFOTAINMENT- TYPE 2 (IF EQUIPPED)
6.1 Home Screen
Home Screen is the main screen for the user to interact with the Infotainment System
Home Screen is displayed when user press the home icon or home button.
•  Features which are available in infotainment screen is known as Tile.
•  For e. g., Radio, Media, Phone can be accessed through home screen tile.
Graphic
6.1.1 Radio Tile
•  The Radio tile allows quick access to radio features and the Radio menu.
•  Touching the radio tile will open the full Radio screen, from the tile radio can be played and you can move between the radio channels.
Graphic
•  When Radio is playing, station name & frequency will be shown in Radio Tile.
Short cut icon in Radio
Shortcut icon in Radio tile is used for below functions.
•  Change next/previous radio station.
Graphic
Graphic
•  Stop button is used to stop/play the music.
Graphic
6.1.2  Media Tile
•  Touch Media tile screen to open media player.
•  Current playing song name will be displayed in the Media tile.
Graphic
Graphic
Shortcut icon in Media Tile
•  Shortcut icon in media is used to change previous or next song, and pause/play media playback.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
6.1.3 Phone Tile
•  The phone tile shows the details of the phone that is currently connected with vehicle through Bluetooth.
•  If no mobile is currently paired, it will give a quick option to go to the pairing screen in the settings menu.
•  When phone is connected to the infotainment system via Bluetooth, the phone name will display in vehicle infotainment.
•  Tapping on the phone tile, will open Phone Application.
Graphic
Shortcut icon in Phone:
•  Shortcut icon is enabled only when Bluetooth device is paired with Infotainment system.
Recent Phone - Phone icon will take the user to Recent Phone call list of the connected device.
Graphic
Graphic
Contacts - Contact icon will take the user to contact list of the connected mobile through infotainment.
Graphic
Graphic
Dial - Dial icon will take the user to Dial pad of the connected mobile through infotainment.
Graphic
Graphic
6.2 App Drawer
•  Menu page contains all the essential apps and settings.
The following apps are available in the Infotainment System menu page.
•  Phone
•  Media
•  Android Auto
•  Apple CarPlay
•  Settings
•  RVC
•  Fuel Info
•  Radio
•  Sound
•  Owner’s Manual
•  Service Info
Graphic
Graphic
6.2.1 Phone
•  The Phone app shows details of the phone that is currently connected with vehicle through Bluetooth.
•  Using the Phone menu user can access recent calls, favourite contacts, contacts, Dial and SMS.
Graphic
Recent call list:
•  Recent screen will show recent call list of connected devices.
Graphic
Contact Details:
•  Contact list of connected devices can be easily accessed by using this option.
Graphic
Dial:
•  Using dial pad, we can enter new mobile number to contact a person or can find the person by tying mobile number.
Graphic
SMS:
•  While driving or other reasons user can send a SMS to desired person directly from vehicle infotainment
Graphic
6.2.2 Media
•  The Media app takes user to the Infotainment’s media player.
•  User can select audio input source, audio settings, browse song list and playlists.
Graphic
Graphic
Click on the browse option to browse available audio files.
Graphic
Graphic
Click on the source option to shift between various audio sources like USB, Android Auto, Apple CarPlay, and Bluetooth.
Graphic
Graphic
6.2.3 Android Auto
Android Auto brings out the best of in-car infotainment technology by linking the user’s Android™ device with the Mahindra infotainment system.
•  Android Auto focuses on safety & it allows the user to access, and control select applications of Android phone, using various inputs on the vehicle such as touch, steering wheel controls and voice.
•  Android apps can control Music, Navigation and Phone call and it enhances the XUV 3XO CNG driving experience by stay focused on the road with simple, intuitive interfaces, integrated steering wheel controls and Voice recognition.
•  To experience Android Auto, the user must download and install Android Auto app from Google Play Store.
•  Android auto is supported at ‘type A’ USB port
Graphic
Graphic
Features of Android Auto:
•  User can be able to find in-build apps in infotainment screen.
•  By using the apps, user can make call to their contacts by using phone books.
•  Navigation system can be accessed to find the desired location.
•  Music can be played by using in build mobile app.
•  In build Google voice assistance in infotainment screen.
•  Using Mahindra icon, user can be able to switch from Android Auto to vehicle home screen.
6.2.4 Apple CarPlay
•  Apple CarPlay seamlessly integrates iPhone with Mahindra's infotainment, prioritizing safety by projecting key functions onto the vehicle system.
•  Users can control applications like Music, Navigation, Phone calls, and Google search via touch, steering wheel controls, or voice, enhancing XUV 3XO CNG’s driving experience with intuitive interfaces and speech recognition, ensuring safer interaction while driving.
•  Your XUV 3XO CNG supports wired Apple CarPlay.
Graphic
Graphic
Connecting to Apple CarPlay:
•  Connect the phone using your charging cable to the vehicle file transfer socket (Type A USB port) and press Apple CarPlay.
Features:
•  User can find some in-build apps in Apple CarPlay. Using the apps, user can do the following things,
•  Make call to their contacts by using phone books.
•  Access Navigation system to find the desired location.
•  Play Music by using in-build mobile app.
•  Use Siri voice assistance.
6.2.5 Rear View Camera (RVC)
•  On clicking the RVC will open up the Rear view camera feed in Infotainment display.
Graphic
Graphic
Refer ‘Parking Assist System’ chapter for more details.
6.2.6 Radio
•  Radio app directly takes to media player with FM and AM options.
Graphic
Graphic
•  User can set favourite FM channels by using favourite option.
Graphic
6.2.7 Owner’s Manual
•  By using Owner’s Manual option, user can see XUV 3XO CNG Owner's manual & Infotainment manual.
Graphic
Graphic
6.3 Fuel Info
•  Fuel info shows average fuel economy based on fuel level.
Graphic
Graphic
6.4  Settings
•  Various infotainment seatings can be found under this menu.
Graphic
Graphic
6.4.1 Sound Setting
•  Vehicles’ audio functions and settings can be controlled and altered using these settings.
Graphic
Equalizer
•  Equalizer can be used to adjust audio frequency settings according to user preferences. Additionally, custom settings can also be adjusted here.
Graphic
Balance
•  Balance can be used to adjust the sound balance according to their preferences.
•  Centre button: It is given to auto centre out the sound balance.
Graphic
SDVC
•  SDVC known as Speed Dependent volume control will adjust the loudness and quality of the music according to speed of the vehicle by removing the road noise.
Graphic
Volume Setting:
•  User can increase or decrease the volume for the Voice recognition (Alexa & Google Assistance), Notification, Phones, Media
Graphic
Touch Sound
•  Enabling the Touch Sound will give the Touch sound, whenever user clicks in the infotainment system.
Graphic
Default Settings
•  By enabling the below settings, the settings will be restored to the default settings.
Graphic
6.4.2 Display Setting
Brightness
•  User can increase or decrease the brightness of Infotainment using this option.
•  Brightness of display can be adjusted individually for headlamp ON and OFF conditions.
Graphic
Graphic
Power and Sleep
•  User OFF: If this is enabled, then the Blank screen or Analog Clock or Digital Clock will be displayed in Infotainment screen whenever Infotainment system gets OFF as per user selection.
Graphic
•  Display OFF: If this option is enabled display will be switched off whenever display is inactive.
Graphic
6.4.3 Phone Setting
Graphic
•  User can enable or disable Bluetooth connection according to need.
Graphic
Bluetooth Discoverability
•  When BT Discoverability option is pressed, vehicle's Bluetooth device will be shown to nearby devices for 90 seconds.
•  Once any mobile device is connected, Bluetooth functionalities are available.
Graphic
Add Devices
•  By using this option, user can find the nearby devices.
Graphic
Bluetooth Device List
•  User can view the list of devices, already connected to vehicle infotainment.
Graphic
SMS Settings:
SMS Alerts:
•  User can ON or OFF SMS alerts coming from their connected mobile device.
Graphic
6.4.4 Wi-Fi Setting
•  User can connect the Android auto with vehicle wirelessly through Wi-Fi.
Graphic
Graphic
6.4.5 System Setting
Graphic
Date & Time
Sync to GPS:
•  Date and Time can be synced with GPS, it can be manually enabled or disabled by user.
Graphic
Time Zone
•  By using this option user can manually select different time zones.
Graphic
Time Setting
•  User can set and fix the Time format either in 12 Hour or 24 Hour.
Graphic
Date Setting
•  User can set and fix the Date format either in DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY format.
Graphic
Factory Reset
•  If user selects 'Reset', All infotainment settings will be restored to default factory settings.
Graphic
6.4.6 Vehicle Setting
The reflection rate of the inside rearview mirror can be automatically adjusted by the light intensity from a vehicle behind you by pressing the auto dimming IRVM ON/OFF option on Infotainment screen.
Graphic
Access
Using this setting, features such as wireless charging can be enabled or disabled.
Graphic
Lights & Illumination
Light features such as the Daytime Running Lamp can be enabled or disabled using this setting.
Graphic
7 OPENING AND CLOSING THE VEHICLE
XUV3XO CNG comes with RKE or PKE depending on the variant.
Graphic
Your key tag number is given on the tag attached to the key. It is recommended that you record the key tag number and store in a safe place. The keys operate all locks in your vehicle including those of the doors and ignition with steering lock.
Never leave the key in the ignition switch with children in the vehicle. A child could switch on the ignition, start the engine, operate power windows and other controls, or move the vehicle, resulting in personal injuries to the bystander and/or children seated inside.
7.1 Doors
7.1.1 To Open a Door from Inside/ from Outside
From Inside
From Outside
Graphic
Graphic
Pull the door lever away from the door and push the door outward to open.
Pull the door handle firmly outwards to unlock and swing the door open.
7.1.2 Locking / Unlocking Individual Doors from Inside
Individual doors can be locked/unlocked from inside by the respective door lock tabs. Lift the lock tab outwards to unlock or press the tab inwards to lock that particular door.
Graphic
Graphic
A : Lock
B : Unlock
Locking the driver door from inside activates the central locking system, thereby locking/unlocking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer to Central Locking section for further details.
7.1.3 Manual Locking / Unlocking Doors from Outside
The driver door can be manually locked/unlocked from outside by using conventional key. The key is bi-directional; you can insert it into the keyhole either way. Turn the key anti-clockwise to lock or clockwise to unlock the door.
Graphic
A : Lock
B : Unlock
If any one of the door is open while locking the doors, door can be locked in 4th attempt only, if the below two conditions are true.
•  Using key blade for locking the door
•  Door open condition or door switch failed case
A keyhole is provided in the driver door to lock/unlock the doors manually from outside.
Locking the driver door from outside activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer to Central Locking section for further details.
7.1.4 Locking / Unlocking the Tailgate
Graphic
The tailgate is locked/unlocked when locking/unlocking the doors.
To open the tailgate, press the switch located on the inner side of the tailgate door handle.
Now tailgate is unlocked lift it up
With Remote
Graphic
Press the tailgate release button to unlock only the tailgate when the vehicle is locked.
•  Before closing the tailgate, ensure that none of your body parts are trapped. Also, because the tailgate is heavy, it might unexpectedly fall down and close. To prevent any injury, close the tailgate with caution.
•  The tailgate swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the tailgate.
•  Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no restraints are available. To avoid injury in the event of an accident or sudden stops, occupants should always be properly restrained.
•  If you drive with the tailgate open, you will draw dangerous exhaust fumes into your vehicle which can cause serious injury or death to vehicle occupants. If you must drive with the tailgate open, keep the air vents and all windows open so that additional outside air comes into the vehicle.
Cargo can fall out of an open tailgate while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in an unexpected accident. Do not travel with the tailgate open.
Make sure that you close the tailgate before driving. Possible damage may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attached objects if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving.
Remove any obstacles to interrupt closing the tailgate securely.
7.1.5 Tailgate Emergency Release Lever
Your vehicle is equipped with the tailgate emergency release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment.
You can open the tailgate inside the vehicle.
1. Open the cover.
Graphic
2. To unlock the tailgate, push the tailgate emergency release lever inside the trim panel to right side.
Graphic
3. Push the tailgate to open.
•  Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use extreme caution, especially while the vehicle is in motion.
•  For emergencies, be fully aware of the location of the emergency tailgate safety release lever in this vehicle and how to open the tailgate if you are accidentally locked in the luggage compartment.
•  Do not allow children to play in cargo area. If they open the tailgate with the opening lever abruptly, it may cause a serious personal injury.
•  No one should be allowed to occupy the luggage compartment of the vehicle at any time. The luggage compartment is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.
7.2 Central Locking/Unlocking System
All vehicle doors can be locked and unlocked at the same time either from inside or outside the vehicle.
From inside the vehicle:
Graphic
•  The door lock/unlock switch is located on the driver door trim. Driver can simultaneously lock/unlock all the doors by pressing this switch as shown in the image.
•  Press the driver door lock tab down (A) to lock or lift the lock tab up (B) to unlock all doors simultaneously.
Graphic
Graphic
From outside the vehicle:
•  Using RKE/PKE key fob
Graphic
Press the lock/unlock button on the RKE/PKE for locking/unlocking the vehicle.
•  Using PKE Switch (If Equipped)
Press the button in the door handle.
Graphic
•  Using key barrel
To manually lock/unlock all the doors from outside using the conventional key, turn the key anti-clockwise /clockwise respectively in the driver door keyhole.
Graphic
A : Lock
B : Unlock
If any doors are open when central locking is activated, the system locks the open doors when they are closed.
Central locking ALL the doors in the vehicle can also be done using the Remote key. Refer the relevant sections in this chapter for more details.
7.2.1 Child Safety Rear Door Lock
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right side child safety rear door locks. When the lock mechanism is engaged, the rear door(s) cannot be opened from the inside. The door(s) can only be opened from the outside.To activate the child safety right rear door lock, insert the key and rotate towards clockwise direction.To de-activate the child safety right rear door lock, insert the key and rotate towards anti-clockwise direction.
A : Lock
Graphic
B : Unlock
Graphic
If the rear doors are not operable from inside, ensure that the child safety locks have been disabled.
Mahindra strongly recommends that the child safety rear door locks be used whenever there are children travelling in the rear seat.
7.3 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Precautions while Handling Remote Key
•  Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF waves.
•  Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or hood under direct sunlight.
•  Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer.
Graphic
A
LED
C
Tailgate open / Search
B
Lock
D
Unlock
7.3.1 Remote Key Status LED
LED present on Remote would be indicating the user about the Remote lock/unlock/trunk button input and also health of Remote battery.
7.3.2 To Lock and Arm the Vehicle with RKE
Graphic
Press the LOCK button on the RKE for locking and arming the vehicle.
Hazard lamps flash once - if all the doors in the vehicle are locked and armed successfully using RKE.
Hazard lamps flash five times along with Horn - if any of the doors (including bonnet) in the vehicle are open.
If horn is in mute condition the Hazard lamps will flash. To press Lock & Unlock button together to unmute the horn. Now still Hazard lamps flash and horn will work.
7.3.3 Unlock and Disarm the Vehicle with RKE
Graphic
Press the UNLOCK button on the RKE to unlock and disarm the vehicle.
Hazard lamps flash twice - if there was no theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.
Front DRL & Tail lamps flash twice (If Equipped)- if there was no theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.
Hazard lamps flash four times along with horn - if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.
Upon the remote lock, if any of the doors are not closed properly or are left open, the hazard lamps will flash five times to indicate the same.
7.4 Smart Key System/Passive Keyless Entry (PKE) (If Equipped)
Smart Key System enables you to enter or exit your vehicle without the need to manually lock/unlock the doors. You can start/stop, lock or unlock the vehicle using Smart Key. To do this, you only need to carry the Smart Key with you.
Graphic
A : LED
B : Lock
C : Tailgate open / Search
D : Unlock
E : Mechanical key release button
Remote Key Panic alarm feature is not available in Smart Key variants.
The front side of the smart key has three control buttons: Lock (B) and Tail Gate / Search button (C), Unlock (D). There is also a emergency key release button (E), which releases a mechanical key for emergency purposes (E.g. when PKE battery is low).
Graphic
Press the mechanical key release button to open the key blade.
•  When locking or unlocking with Smart Key, the distance between the Smart Key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).
•  Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF waves.
•  Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or hood under direct sunlight.
•  Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer.
•  The Smart Key can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity.
Carrying the Smart Key along with you, you can lock or unlock the doors and tail door and even start and stop the engine without inserting the key. Functions of the buttons on a Smart Key is similar to the remote keyless entry.
Locking the vehicle:
1. Carry the Smart Key
2. Close all the doors
3. Press the button in the door handle
Graphic
4. The hazard warning lights will blink with alarm once to indicate the locking (5 blinks will be provided if engine hood is open while locking).
5. Make sure that the doors are locked by pulling at the outside door handles.
•  Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7m from the outside door handle.
•  Vehicle can be locked centrally by pressing the button in the door handle nearer to the PKE (PKE should be nearer to the triggered side). E.g., locking/unlocking of the co-driver door is possible only if PKE is around the co-driver area.
•  Even after pressing the outside door handle button, if the doors do not lock, a chime is heard for 5 times, then one of the following situations are true:
–  A Smart Key is kept inside the vehicle.
–  The vehicle/key is in IGN ON or ACC ON position.
–  One of the doors not closed properly.
•  On attempting to lock by pressing the button in door handle, the chime will sound for 3 times if the steering is not locked.
•  With the one Smart Key inside, on locking the vehicle using the remote lock button, the key which is kept inside would get deactivated completely for the security of the vehicle. In order to make the key to active again, the vehicle should be unlocked either using Smart Key or by pressing remote unlock.
Unlocking the vehicle:
1. Carry the smart Key.
2. Press the button in the door handle.
3. All doors would unlock and hazard warning lights will blink with alarm twice.
•  Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from the outside door handle.
•  Vehicle can be unlocked centrally by pressing the button in the door handle only when the key is in same side of the door where the button is pressed.
Unlocking the Tail door alone:
The tailgate is locked/unlocked when locking/unlocking the doors.
Graphic
To open the tailgate, touch the opening switch inner side of the tailgate door handle with the tailgate unlocked, and then lift it up.
In theft deterrent mode, you can unlock only the tailgate by pressing the tailgate switch with the smart key. The tailgate will be locked again when closing it.
If the smart key felt inside unknowingly and if tail door closed, all the doors will unlock automatically with hazard and buzzer blinks twice.
•  Before closing the tailgate, ensure that none of your body parts are trapped. Also, because the tailgate is heavy, it might unexpectedly fall down and close. To prevent any injury, close the tailgate with caution.
•  The tailgate swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the tailgate.
•  Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no restraints are available. To avoid injury in the event of an accident or sudden stops, occupants should always be properly restrained.
•  If you drive with the tailgate open, you will draw dangerous exhaust fumes into your vehicle which can cause serious injury or death to vehicle occupants. If you must drive with the tailgate open, keep the air vents and all windows open so that additional outside air comes into the vehicle.
Cargo can fall out of an open tailgate while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in an unexpected accident. Do not travel with the tailgate open.
Make sure that you close the tailgate before driving. Possible damage may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attached objects if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving.
Remove any obstacles to interrupt closing the tailgate securely.
7.4.1 Engine START/STOP Button
The engine can be started or stopped by the presence of the Smart Key inside the vehicle.
Graphic
Whenever the doors are opened, the engine start/stop button will be illuminated and go off after few second.
Upon any fault identification by the system in the start/stop switch, an alert would be provided in the Instrument cluster. Please visit the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately to rectify the problem.
Even with the failure in the start/stop switch, vehicle's normal function may work which depends on the severity of the failure. Please visit the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center to rectify the problem immediately.
Engine start/stop button positions: To operate the engine start/stop switch to its intended function, Smart Key should be inside the vehicle.
OFF: To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and press the engine start/stop button once. Status LED in the engine start/stop button goes OFF to indicate the OFF position.
If the engine is not switching off by pressing the engine start/stop button (one press), press and hold the engine start/stop button for more than 3 second or rapidly press and release the engine start/stop button 3 times within 3 second. On doing so, the vehicle ignition status is changed to ACC position till 30 second, then it will change to OFF position. Contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center at the earliest.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic anti-theft steering column lock. The steering wheel locks when the engine start/stop button is in OFF position to protect against the theft. The steering wheel locks automatically when the driver door is opened or 25 second after engine start/stop button changes to OFF position. If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you open the driver door and on attempting to lock the vehicle, a warning chirp along with the hazard blinks thrice. Try locking the steering wheel again (by toggling Engine Start/Stop button). If the problem is not solved, we recommend to take the vehicle to nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
ON: To switch ON the ignition, press the engine start/stop button when the switch position is in OFF / ACC without depressing the brake pedal and with the Smart Key inside the vehicle. Status LED in the engine start/stop button will turn Red to indicate the IGN ON position and the vehicle is ready for starting.
Keeping the vehicle in ignition ON position for longer time without engine running, would drain the battery. Turn OFF the ignition if engine is not to be started.
Vehicle ignition would not turn to ON position on any of the following conditions:
•  If the electronic steering lock is not getting unlocked.
–  A warning would be displayed in the Instrument cluster. If the steering wheel doesn’t unlock properly, press the start/stop button while turning the steering wheel right/left to release the tension on the lock.
Graphic
Graphic
Still, if you are not able to turn ON the IGN, please contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Service Centre.
•  Steering wheel not lock warning
–  If the electronics Steering Wheel not getting even all locking conditions are satisfy then ESCL will display this warning.
Graphic
Graphic
•  Electronic Steering lock module (ESCL) not learned warning.
Graphic
Graphic
–  A warning would be displayed in the Instrument cluster. If the steering wheel does not pair with PKE ECU. In this case please contact Mahindra Authorized dealership to check system.
•  Steering wheel malfunction warning:
–  A warning would be displayed in the Instrument cluster. If the steering wheel lock unit has system failure. In this case please contact Mahindra dealership to check system failure.
Graphic
Graphic
•  If the key is not detected inside the vehicle or far away from the driver which is not in detectable position.
Graphic
Graphic
–  A warning would be displayed in the Instrument cluster along with a beep sound for a few second. Bring the Smart Key inside the vehicle if not in the vehicle or keep the key away from any electronic gadgets to allow the system to detect the key.
•  When engine start/stop button is ON or engine is in running condition with vehicle at standstill and if any door is opened, the system checks for the Smart Key. If the Smart Key is not inside the vehicle, an alert in the Instrument cluster is displayed along with a chirp for 5 times to indicate key not detected inside.
Graphic
Graphic
Bring the Smart Key inside the vehicle or keep the key in the detectable position whenever you are inside the vehicle.
Starting the vehicle : To start the engine, press the Clutch and press the engine start/stop button once with the key inside the vehicle. The engine can be started from any position (OFF / ON) of the start/stop switch.
Ensure the TGS is in neutral position before starting.
If engine start/stop button is pressed without pressing the brake pedal, engine will not start and the vehicle power modes will change as follows: OFF→ ON →OFF→ ON.
If the engine start/stop button is pressed from the OFF position directly, along with the brake in depressed position, there may be a small delay in the engine cranking. This is normal and not to be taken as a fault.
Never press the engine start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of direction control and braking function, leading to an accident.
Once the engine is started, it would not stop even if the key is not inside the vehicle. Before leaving the driver seat, always make sure engine start/stop button is in OFF position and always take the Smart Key with you. Vehicle safety and security would be affected if these precautions are not followed.
Emergency stop: To turn the engine OFF in an emergency, press and hold the engine start/stop button for more than 3 second or panic press rapidly press and release the engine start/stop button 3 times within 3 second. On doing so, the vehicle ignition is changed to ACC position.
BACK up Start: If the key fob battery is low, the key may not be detected. In such a situation, press the start/stop button once while the status LED in the button is blinking red color, keep the key in the armrest pocket and then press the start/stop switch to turn ON the IGN & LED will changes to permanent Red.
Graphic
Graphic
If key fob battery is detected low by the system, an alert would be triggered while turning OFF the ignition. Change the battery by following the procedure as mentioned in the section for battery replacement.
Graphic
Graphic
Key fob battery low can be detected only if the key has been continuously used in the vehicle. Keeping the key outside the vehicle for longer duration and then using it with the drained battery cannot be detected.
7.4.2 Smart Key Warning
When a smart key is left inside the vehicle and all doors are closed, LCD display shows this message for 5 second if you lock the door using the other smart key.
Graphic
Graphic
LCD display shows this message if you leave the vehicle with the Smart Key when the Start/Stop button is ON or Start position.
Graphic
Graphic
LCD display shows this message for 5 second if the Smart Key battery is weak when you press the Start/Stop button. Replace the battery with new one.
Graphic
Graphic
LCD display shows this message when start fails due to the battery discharged smart key, etc.
Graphic
Graphic
LCD display shows this message for 5 second when there is malfunction on the Start/Stop button. If the message appears constantly, bring your vehicle to Authorized Mahindra Service Center for checkup.
Graphic
Graphic
7.4.3 Vehicle Locking/Unlocking in an Emergency Situation
If the Smart Key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the doors by using the mechanical key:
1. To remove the mechanical key, press and hold the release button in the side of the key fob and pull the mechanical key head.
2. Insert the key into the keyhole in the door nearer to the door handle. Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle to unlock and turn it towards the front to lock.
3. To reinstal the mechanical key, put the key into the key fob and push it until a click is heard.
It is strictly not advisable to leave the key fobs in the vehicle. Vehicle can be started by any unauthorized person.
A maximum of 2 Smart Keys can be registered to a single vehicle. If you lose a key, we strictly recommend to contact Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately to block the lost key and to get a new key.
The Smart Key may not work if any of the following occurs:
•  The Smart Key is close to a radio station, airport or an area where there is a possibility of large radio transmissions which can interfere with the normal operation of the smart key.
•  The Smart Key is near a mobile or a cellular phone or some electronic gadgets like Laptop/Tablets. The signal from the Smart Key could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smart phone. Avoid placing the Smart Key and your electronic gadgets in the same trouser or jacket pocket or in the bag and maintain adequate distance between the two devices.
•  Another vehicle Smart Key is being operated close to your vehicle.
•  Smart Key kept inside the glove box or top bin in the instrument panel may not be detected sometimes. Keep the Smart Key in the visible zone or in your pocket for getting it detected.
•  Keep the Smart Key away from the water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
Make sure the vehicle ignition is in OFF state, whenever leaving the vehicle even with the key. By keeping the vehicle ignition in ON/ACC state will hamper the vehicle security.
Do not hand over the Smart Key to any unauthorized person or service provider. Your vehicle security system may be compromised in doing so.
7.5 Remote Battery
Battery Specification
Battery Voltage
3 V
Battery Capacity
225 mAh
Battery Model Name
2032
Remote Battery Replacement
If the remote operation is inconsistent when any of the buttons are pressed, then it indicates that the Remote battery is weak.
The rear side of the remote is snap fitted. Flip open the key blade and use two fingers on the side of the fob and gently pry open the battery cover.
Graphic
Use a small flat head screwdriver to gently pry battery to remove out and discard the same. Insert new batteries of 3V type (Battery No. 2032). While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive side of the batteries face up. Align both the halves of the remote casing and press to snap fit. Check operation of the remote.
While prying the Remote case, take care not to damage the battery.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.
Pull out the battery and discard the same. Insert new battery of same type. While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive side of the batteries face up. Align both the halves of the Remote and screw to tight fit. Check operation of the remote.
The Batteries are Li Ion batteries. They should be kept away from children.
This product contains a lithium button cell. If the button cell is swallowed, severe internal burns can occur within a mere two hours and lead to death.
Keep new or removed batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, discontinue use and keep away from children. If you think that batteries have been swallowed or are stuck in any part of the body, seek medical help immediately.
7.6 Remote Function
7.6.1 Auto Locking
All doors will get locked automatically when;
•  All doors are closed properly
•  Vehicle speed is greater than 20 km/h
Auto Locking ON DOOR OPEN — Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then the auto-lock will reactivate only if all doors are closed, the vehicle speed goes below 5 km/h and further crosses 20 km/h.
Auto Locking ON MASTER ACTUATOR UNLOCK — Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then the auto-lock will reactivate only if all doors are closed, the vehicle speed goes below 5 km/h and further crosses 20 km/h.
7.6.2 Auto Unlocking
Auto Unlock of all doors will happen in the following conditions ;
•  When Ignition is switched from ON to OFF, OR
•  In the event of a crash (only on Airbag Variants)
7.6.3 Auto Re-locking
Auto Re-lock of all doors will happen when;
•  No door status change for 45 second after unlocking the vehicle using RKE/PKE.
7.6.4 Search Function
Graphic
Press the tailgate button on the RKE 2 times within 2 second to locate the vehicle in a parking lot.
Search alarm can also bring attention to the vehicle and surrounding area, warning about an intruder or seek for help.
When the SEARCH function is ON, the hazard lamps flash along with an alarm for 30 second. In this mode;
•  Pressing any button on the RKE again switches OFF the alarm.
•  Pressing the UNLOCK button switches OFF the alarm and disarms/unlocks all doors.
The search function works both during the Locked/Unlocked conditions of the vehicle.
7.6.5 Mute/Un-mute Function
Graphic
The chirps can be muted / unmuted. Press the LOCK & UNLOCK buttons together for 3 second to toggle between MUTE/UN-MUTE mode.
Hazard lamps will flash once to indicate un-mute to mute condition. Hazard lamp & chrip will flash once to indicate Mute to un-mute.
In the un-muted condition, alarm chirps can be heard during Auto Re-lock (1 Chirp), RKE Lock when door open (5 Chirps) and RKE Unlock if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period (4 Chirps).
In the mute condition, only hazard would flash and alarm chirps would not be audible.
7.7 Theft Detent Warning System
Arming of Vehicle: Once all the doors are closed and locked with remote by pressing lock button, Theft Detent warning system would get activated.
Theft Detent Trigger: If any one tries to manipulate the Ignition or manually opens the doors or manually unlocks the doors, Theft Detent warning system alarm is activated by blinking the turn lamps and blowing Burglar horn for 27 second. Once the alarm is triggered, it can be disabled by pressing unlock button on remote or switching on the Ignition by using valid key.
7.8 Remote Key Operating Range
Graphic
Using Remote, you can lock/arm or unlock/disarm the vehicle from distances approx. 30 ft. (9 m).
If there is reduction in Remote range, please follow the steps below:
Check the distance: The Remote key may be too far from the vehicle. Stand closer to the vehicle during rain or bad weather.
Check the location: Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signals. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the Remote key higher, and try again. Moreover, closeness to a radio transmitter such as radio station tower, airport transmitter, mobile or CB radios may lead to reduction in range of remote key.
Check the Remote key battery: See battery replacement procedure, given later in this section.
If the Remote key is still not working correctly, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
7.9 PKE Center Console Antenna in Back Up Mode
Graphic
The Key fob is to be kept as in the above image (Key fob logo should be facing tailgate) under the armrest, when the system requests, like in the case of the below error message in the instrument cluster.
Graphic
Graphic
This message is displayed only when the PKE system fails to detect the key fob which is inside the vehicle when the user is trying to Switch ON the ignition.
On pressing the Start/Stop switch 1st time with the key fob under the armrest. The Start-stop switch LED will blink in red color, with the above error message will be displayed again in the cluster.
In this case, if you press the Start/Stop switch again before the above error message in the instrument cluster goes away the 2nd time, the vehicle will start in Back-Up mode, if the Clutch(MT)/Brake(AMT) pedal is pressed.
7.10 If PKE/RKE Key fob is Lost
If you have lost the programmed PKE / RKE Key fob, contact Authorized Mahindra Service Center for procuring a new Smart Key.
While programming a new key set, you will have to submit all the keys available with you, to an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
Please note that there is a limitation (max. 2 keys at a time) to the number of keys that can be ordered. The minimum timeframe required to supply the duplicate keys is 10 days after all the formalities are completed. Please contact the Authorized Mahindra Service Center to understand the formalities involved.
If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to deactivate the anti-theft devices or start the engine.
If the key is stolen or lost, communicate to an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for de-activating the function of the lost or stolen key. This is essential to avoid unauthorized access using the misplaced key.
Only PKE/RKE transmitters programmed to your vehicle electronics can be used for remote locking and unlocking of your vehicle.
7.11 Key Fob Limitations
When the vehicle key fob is not working properly, it may be due to radio frequency (RF) interference caused by an external source like transformer, amateur radio, etc. which emits power levels that is higher than the vehicle key fob. This interference may be resulting in RF signal not being received by RKE / PKE system controller.
Customer may not get panic due to this non-function of key fob. After moving from the interference zone, key fob may start working properly.
If still key fob not working then contact Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.
7.12 Engine Immobiliser System
Engine Immobiliser System is a security system that prevents the vehicle from being operated by an unauthorized person. It prevents the engine from being started unless it recognizes signals from the correct coded key. When a wrong key is inserted or a theft attempt is detected, the alarm is set off, and the hazard lamps flash along with a siren.
The system is automatically activated when the key is removed from the ignition.
7.12.1 Features of the Immobiliser System:
•  Prevents the vehicle being started by anyone not in possession of the correct vehicle key.
•  The vehicle is automatically protected after the key is removed from the ignition/vehicle in PKE. At every ignition ON, if the vehicle does not recognize the correct key code, the engine check lamp will blink and security tell tale lamp will illuminate and the engine cannot be started.
•  The vehicle will not be protected until the key has been taken out of the ignition/vehicle in PKE.
If the engine check lamp flashes or remains continuously illuminated after the ignition being switched ON, there is a system malfunction. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
With the correct coded key in the vehicle and pressing the SSB ON, automatically recognizes and authenticates the system. It enables the engine to start.
In the event of the vehicle not starting with the correct key, switch off the ignition for a minimum of 1 minute and attempt to start the vehicle again.
Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine immobilizer system. Any unauthorized changes or modifications can affect proper operation of the system and will void your warranty.
The security system will be activated when the vehicle is locked using the PKE / RKE key fob. Locking the doors with the manual key will also activate the security system.Using the ignition key blade to open the diver door, when the vehicle was locked and armed with PKE / RKE key fob, in this condition if any of the door is opened which results in door switch status change will be treated as unauthorized by the system setting and this will trigger the alarm. Press the unlock button on the PKE/RKE key fob to off the alarm.
7.13 Opening and Closing the Hood
The hood release lever is located in the driver side foot well area, below the instrument panel. To open hood follow the steps below:
Graphic
1. Pull the lever below the driver side instrument panel to release the hood.
2. Lift the hood a little to access the safety latch holding the hood striker. This safety latch is located below the hood at the centre.
Graphic
3. Lift the safety latch and lift the hood.
Graphic
4. Hood is supported by a stay rod. Lift the safety latch and lift the hood.
•  Do not open the hood immediately after a drive; the engine compartment will be very hot.
•  Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched properly, the hood could open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a total loss of visibility, resulting in an accident.
•  Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised position, as vision is obstructed.
To close the hood, follow the below steps:
1. Remove the stay rod supporting the hood by slightly lifting the hood.
2. Bring the hood near to its self-opening/closing position.
3. Now, push the hood to close and ensure the primary latch is engaged.
4. Before driving off, check hood is locked properly with primary latch fully engaged.
Bonnet Open Hazard - When the bonnet is open and vehicle is in unlock condition:
•  Hazard lamps flash continuously to alert the user that the bonnet is open.
•  Hazard cluster telltale also flashes.
To stop the warning, do any one of the following:
— Close the bonnet
— Press the hazard button TWICE
— Change the turn signal stalk position
— Drive the vehicle > 10 km/h
7.14 Fuel-Lid Opening and Closing
The fuel-lid can be opened by the lever located at the foot of the driver seat. Lift the lever up firmly to open.
Graphic
Petrol
Turn the fuel cap counter-clockwise to open. Hang the fuel filler cap on the holder mounted on the back of the lid. After refuelling, turn the cap clockwise until you hear a “click”, and close the lid by pushing it back.
Graphic
Ensure the fuel cap and lid are securely closed before starting the vehicle.
CNG
CNG refilling valve is located near the Petrol filling port.
Graphic
Remove the dust plug of refilling valve for filling the CNG. Reinstall the dust plug after refueling.
Ensure the vehicle is switched OFF before refuelling. If the engine is running and fuel lid is open, vehicle will be switched OFF automatically.
If the dust plug is not properly reinstalled there will be no gas flow and the engine will not start.
If the fuel filler lid is not closed properly the engine will not start and “fuel lid open” alert will be displayed in instrument cluster.
8 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS
8.1 Control Switches
The driver door switch bank is located on the driver door armrest/handle and controls and the various functions:
Graphic
A
ORVM Folding/Unfolding Switch*
B
Aiming Switch
C
Driver Door Window Switch
D
Rear RH Window Switch
E
Door Lock/Unlock Switch
F
Window Lock Switch
G
Rear LH Window Switch
H
Passenger’s Window Switch
I
Mirror Selection Switch
  * If Equipped
8.1.1  Driver Door Power Window Switch
Power windows can be operated only when the ignition is “ON” position.
Power Window Control after IGN OFF - The power window control will be available for 3 minute after IGN OFF condition.
The driver can operate all the power windows in the vehicle through the quadruple switch on the driver door armrest/handle.
Graphic
Graphic
Other passengers in the vehicle can raise or lower their respective window glasses individually by using the separate switches provided on each of the door trim pads/armrests.
To lower/raise the window glass push/pull, the power window switches respectively.
Do not operate the power windows frequently. This will drain the vehicle battery.
If you operate the switches often during a short period of time, the system might become inoperable for a certain duration to prevent damage due to overheating. The system will return to normal functioning shortly.
It is recommended to operate one window switch at a time.
While operating the power windows, check for obstructions like head, hand, etc. which may lead to personal injuries.
8.1.2 Power Window Lock Switch
The main power window quadruple switch in the driver door trim has a power window lock switch to enable or disable operation of rear passenger window switches.
Graphic
To disable the rear passenger power windows, press the window lock switch down.
To revert to normal operation, press the window lock switch again.
8.1.3 Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Graphic
The door lock/unlock switch is located on the driver door trim. Driver can simultaneously lock/unlock all the doors by pressing this switch as shown in the image.
8.1.4 Smart Power Window with Anti-Pinch
This is applicable for driver door only (If Equipped).
Smart power window is one of the significant safety features with the anti-pinch function, which automatically reverses the direction of glass if an obstruction is detected during the auto up mode.
Graphic
This feature consists of three functions:
•  Auto UP
•  Auto DOWN
•  Anti-Pinch during Auto UP
Auto UP
Pull the power window switch up for a moment and release. The glass moves all the way up automatically. You do not need to hold the switch till the glass closes.
Auto DOWN
Press the power window switch down for a moment and release. The glass moves all the way down automatically. You do not need to hold the switch till the glass comes down.
Anti-Pinch during Auto UP
During Auto UP if any obstacle is detected with the force value ranging between 70~100 N (~7-10 kg), the controller senses the load and reverses the direction of the glass to downward direction for almost full stroke length.
If the force against the glass is less than the specified value, then this function does not operate. So, While operating the power windows, check for obstructions like head, hand, etc. which may lead to severe personal injuries.
If power window anti-pinch is used continuously for more than 20 times, the power window express feature will have thermal cut off and it will not operate for 20 second and after that for one cycle it will operate and once the temperature comes to nominal, then it will start operating normally.
Extended Power Window
All doors power windows can be rolled UP/DOWN within 3 minute after ignition off.
8.2 Mirrors
8.2.1 Manual ORVM (If Equipped)
Graphic
Exterior rear view mirror on both left and right sides provides the maximum side rear view information to the driver.
Both the ORVMs are hinged and can be manually folded or unfolded. This avoids hindrances in narrow areas and parking slots. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support, while folding or unfolding.
Objects seen in convex mirrors are much closer than they appear. Do not overestimate the distance of the objects that you see in the mirrors.
8.2.2 Electric Adjustable ORVM
Graphic
Graphic
The electric exterior mirror adjustment switch is located on the driver door trim/handle. The joystick on the switch can be used to select the left/right mirror and also to adjust the respective mirror.
8.2.3 ORVM Folding/Unfolding (If Equipped)
Mirror Fold Function: To fold the ORVM assembly, press towards the right side of the switch with ignition ON condition.
ORVM folds automatically when:
•  The doors locked with the remote from outside the vehicle.
For Auto fold function, the switch should be in neutral position.
Graphic
Graphic
Mirror Unfold Function: To unfold the ORVM assembly, press towards the left side of the switch with ignition ON condition.
Graphic
Graphic
ORVM unfolds automatically when:
•  Mirror is already in folded condition and ORVM switch is neutral condition and IGN is turned ON.
8.3 Interior Rearview Mirror (IRVM)
The interior rearview mirror provides the rearview information to the driver and also aids during reversing.
8.3.1 Manual Type
Graphic
You can manually adjust the rearview mirror by pushing or pulling its adjusting lever to avoid blindness at night due to other vehicles behind you
When you are not able to see the back of your vehicle at night, adjust the rearview mirror by holding the mirror body and pushing or pulling it to a desired angle so that you can secure a clear rear view.
8.4 Storage Compartments
8.4.1 Luggage Compartment
Luggage compartment is provided in the vehicle.
It is using for keeping bigger/large objects.
Graphic
Do not store too many items in the luggage compartment.
When you put the luggage, make sure that the luggage is placed firmly enough to avoid being shaken while driving. A shaky or improperly fixed luggage may injure the driver or passenger. Besides, ensure that the luggage does not obstruct the field of the rearview
8.4.2 Rear Parcel Tray
Rear Parcel tray is provided in the vehicle.
It is using to storing small objects in the vehicle.
Graphic
The Maximum load carrying capacity is 7 kg.
Do not store too many items in the parcel tray.
8.4.3 Sun Glass Holder
Roof mounted sun glass holder is an integral part of the front interior lamp.
Graphic
Graphic
Press the lid to release the latch and lower the holder. It is strategically positioned to be accessed easily by both the driver and front passenger.
Do not access the sun glass holder while you are driving. It may distract your concentration and could lead to an accident.
8.4.4 Glove Box
The glove box is located just below the Left side of Instrument panel. To open, gently pull the lever and lower the lid. To close the glove box, raise the lid all the way up and gently press to lock the lid.
Graphic
It is suggested to keep copies of all vehicle documents along with the Owner’s Manual Kit in the glove box for reference when needed.
To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, glove box lids should be kept closed when the vehicle is in motion.
8.4.5 Console Storage with Armrest
Graphic
You can use the console storage by lifting up the console lid with the knob.
To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment.
Do not store items that are damageable or cause noises since they can move around in the compartment while driving.
Do not store any flammable materials such as cigarette lighter in the console box or other space. In hot weather, they may explode and cause a fire.
Graphic
Graphic
By pressing up the console knob, you can use the compartment in the console storage.
The console storage can be used as an armrest for both the driver and the passenger.
You can store a max. 10-inch mobile device (Galaxy tab, iPad, etc.) in the centre console storage.
8.4.6 Front Cup Holder/Rear Cup Holder and Armrest (If Equipped)
Front Cup Holder:
Graphic
The cup holder located in the floor console between the front seats, It can be used for small cups or cans that are closed or have a lid.
Rear cup holder and armrest (If Equipped)
Graphic
The cup holders are located on both the left and right side trims.
Only sealed cups/cans with lid to be used in the cup holders.
Use caution when using the cup holders. A spilled beverage that is very hot can injure driver or passengers. Spilled liquids can also damage interior trim and electrical components. Any spilled beverage can also startle the driver and cause a loss of control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.
Rear Ticket Holder
Graphic
The rear ticket holder is provided on the rear side of the floor console below the 2nd row AC vents. You can use it for small items.
8.4.7 Bottle Holder
Bottle holders are located on both the front door lower trims. You can use them to store maps, papers, small books, bottles, etc.
Graphic
Only sealed/closed bottles are to be used in the bottle holders.
8.4.8 Seat Back/Magazine Pocket (If Equipped)
Graphic
The seat back pockets are located on the back of the front seats for holding lightweight papers/books/magazines, etc.
To avoid injury, do not place large or hard objects in the seat back pockets. Do not put more than 1 kg weight in seat back pockets.
8.4.9 Grab Handle
Graphic
Foldable grip handles are provided above the front (passenger only) and second row outboard seats.
8.5  Sun Visor
8.5.1 Sun Visor and Ticket Holder
Sun Visor
Use the sun visor to shield the direct sunlight through the front or side windows.
To shield the sunlight through the windshield, pull it downward.
To shield the sunlight through the side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket and swing it to the side.
Graphic
Ticket Holder: Tickets and cards can be stored.
Graphic
•  Adjusting the sun visor or using the mirror or ticket holder on the sun visor while driving may cause an accident by taking your attention away or blocking your view.
•  Adjust and use the sun visor when the vehicle is not in move.
8.5.2 Vanity Mirror and Lamp (If Equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
Vanity Mirror and Lamp
Swing the sun visor down and open the cover to reveal the mirror, then the lamp will come on.
Do not adjust the sun visor while the vehicle is in motion.
8.6 Center Fascia Switches
Graphic
A
Rear Defogger
C
Hazard Warning Switch
B
PAB ON/OFF Indicator
D
Steering Mode*
* – If Equipped
•  When PAB switch in ON position, then Passenger airbag De-activation status will be OFF
8.7 Driver Switch Bank
Graphic
A
ESP OFF
B
CNG or Petrol mode
C
Engine Stop/Start
D
Hill Descent Control (HDC)*
*If equipped
8.8 Overhead Console (If Equipped)
Graphic
A
Door Mode Switch
E
Sunshade Open
B
Map Reading Lamp-RH
F
Map Reading Lamp-LH
C
Sunshade Close
G
Sunroof Switch
D
MIC
   
8.9 Microphone (If Applicable)
Graphic
Graphic
Microphone is located on the roof above driver side.
It is used when talking on the phone.
The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers.
To use the hands-free system, you must pair your Bluetooth® phone in the system.
8.10 Power Outlets
The USB outlets are located on the center bezel below the DATC switch bezel.
The Type ‘C’ Charging Port (A) shown in the image is only for charging.
The Type ‘A’ USB Port (B) shown in the image can be used as an input for the music system.
You can connect iPods, USB memory sticks, and other devices as an input to listen to music through the vehicle’s speakers.
Graphic
A: Type ‘C’ Charging Port (If Equipped)
B: Type ‘A’ USB Port (If Equipped)
It is recommended to connect an input device only when the vehicle is stationary. Attempting to do so while driving may distract you and potentially lead to accidents.
Second Row Type ‘C’ Charger Outlet
Graphic
Type ‘C’ charger outlet is provided on the rear side of the floor console below the 2nd row AC vents.
It can be used only for charging and it is intended to be used by second row passengers.
12V - Power Outlet
The 12V power outlet socket is provided below the rear AC vents. Electrical equipment/appliances like mobile phone charger, cigarette lighter, etc. can be used in the outlets.
Graphic
The power sockets function only when the ignition is in ACC or ON positions. It is recommended to use the power sockets when the ignition is ON to avoid battery drain.
To avoid serious injury:
•  Close the power outlet cap when not in use.
•  Do not allow children to use or play with the power outlet.
•  When using electrical appliances, strictly follow the manufacturer’s instruction manual.
•  Never use the power outlet for electric heaters while sleeping.
•  Never insert foreign objects into the power outlet.
•  Never use malfunctioning electrical appliances.
•  Never insert inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the power outlet.
Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet in any way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunction or fire, which could cause serious damage to equipment and/or personal injuries. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for any necessary repairs.
To prevent injuries and accidents, secure all electrical appliances before use. Do not use any appliance that may:
•  Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving.
•  Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, falling or overheating.
•  Emit steam, while the windows of the passenger compartment are closed.
•  Remove the plug from the power outlet after using the electric device. Leaving the electric device plugged in for more time may cause the battery to drain.
•  Do not use the power outlet to connect electric accessories or equipment that are not designed to operate on 12V.
•  Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into the power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio noise and may interfere with other electronic systems or devices in your vehicle.
8.11 Lamps
8.11.1 Interior Lamps
Interior lamps comprise front/rear roof lamps, ambience lamps and ignition key ring illumination. These lamps can be used for an illuminated entry. In auto mode, the roof lamps (courtesy lamps) and ignition key ring illuminate when any of the doors are opened. Once all doors are closed, the interior lamps switch OFF.
Graphic
Graphic
A
Spot Lamp Switch (Passenger’s)
B
Main Room Lamp Switch (Auto Mode)
C
Spot Lamp Switch (Driver’s)
Front Roof Lamp: The front roof lamps are located in the roof console above the interior rearview mirror.
The roof lamp can be switched ON pressing the ON switch A & C. Press the switch again to switch OFF the roof lamp. Also the lamp goes off once the Lock button in RKE/PKE is pressed and the same will be ON again when it is unlock button in RKE / PKE is pressed.
For Auto mode: Auto Mode switch (B) is in pressed condition the roof lamp will be ON when any of the doors are opened.
And the lamp will go off once the doors are closed.
Map Reading Lamp (If Equipped):
Graphic
Map reading lamps are located on the both sides of the roof near the grab handle above the second-row seats.
Do not leave the roof/map reading lamp in permanent ON mode. This will drain your vehicle battery.
Centre Room Lamp: The centre room lamp comes on when pressing in this switch.
It goes out when pressing in the switch again. However, if the main room lamp switch is in Auto/door position, this lamp comes on/goes off when opening/closing a door.
It can not be switched off independently in auto mode.
Graphic
8.11.2 Exterior Lamps
Lighting Control Stalk: The lighting control stalk is located on the right-hand side of the steering wheel and is a part of the combination switch.
It controls operations of parking lamps, head lamps, head lamp beam selection, high beam flashing, front/rear fog lamps and turn signals when the ignition switch is ON.
Graphic
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to Position “OFF” to switch OFF all lamps.
i) Turn Signals
Graphic
A: Turn Signal - Left xxxxx B: Turn Signal - Right
Taking a Right Turn:
•  Push the lighting control stalk clockwise to indicate a right turn. The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing towards the right flashes along with the right side turn signal lamps (front, rear & ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards right.
After you have completed your right turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator lamp.
Taking a Left Turn :
•  Push the lighting control stalk anti-clockwise to indicate a left turn. The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing towards the left flashes along with the left side turn signal lamps (front, rear & ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards left.
•  After you have completed your left turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator lamp.
If the turn signal lamps on the instrument panel flash faster than normal, there may be a possibility that one or more of the turn signal lamp bulbs have blown. Replace the blown bulb immediately.
Changing Lanes:
The system is equipped with one touch lane indicator function which can be used to signal a lane change.
To signal a lane change, move the light control stalk clockwise or anti-clockwise to the limit point of free movement of the lever and release. The turn signals will flash three times and stop.
The turn signals will continue flashing as long as the lighting control stalk is held in the limit point of free movement.
ii) Parking Lamp ON
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise/downward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk 2nd position from the top position to switch ON the parking lamps.
Graphic
The tail lamp, license plate lamp, instrument panel illumination lamps and all interior switches are also activated when the parking lamp is switched ON.
The Park lamps will be switched OFF automatically after opening the driver door. If a user still wants a park lamp they must turn OFF & turn ON manually.
Park Lamp Warning Buzzer: A warning buzzer sound will be provided if the park lamp is left ON with ignition OFF, as soon as driver door is opened.
iii) Head Lamp “AUTO” Function
Graphic
Auto head lamp switches ON the head lamp based on the outside ambient light sensed by the RLS sensor. This is useful when travelling through tunnels or low light areas.Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise/upward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to the 3rd position from top to switch ON Auto head lamp function.
•  Do not clean the sensor with detergent or wax.
•  On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use manual mode. The turning on or off time of the lamps varies depending on the weather, season, or circumstances.
•  Any aftermarket sunfilm or spray may cause the lighting system to malfunction.
•  When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, room, tail, and head lights might blink for a very short time. It is a normal phenomenon recognizing the automatic setting.
•  There may be a difference between ambient light intensity sensed by the RLS sensor and the human eye. Hence it is possible that during low light conditions, the head lamp is activated early as the RLS sensor senses it as low intensity. This is a normal behavior.
iv) Head Lamp ON
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the “arrow” on 1st position from the top to switch ON the head lamps.
Graphic
v) Head Lamp Low/High Beam
Switch ON the head lamp, and push the lighting control stalk down (away) from steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp high beam & lift/pull the lighting control stalk up again towards the steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp low beam. In head lamp high beam, the high beam tell-tale lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates indicating high beam option selected.
Graphic
A
Low Beam
B
High Beam
Your vehicle head lamps are vented and moisture may be collected on the inside of the head lamp lens under certain climatic and geographical conditions. This moisture will evaporate once the head lamps have been switched ON for a few minutes.
vi) Head Lamp Flash
Graphic
Pull the lighting control stalk towards the steering wheel to instantaneously flash the head lamp high beam and low beam.
Head Lamp Levelling System
When the vehicle is either fully or partially loaded, it may have an upward inclination disturbing the head lamp aiming. A correct head lamp setting provides good visibility to the driver with minimum inconvenience to other road users.
Graphic
To properly aim the head lamp beam, use the head lamp levelling switch. This switch is located on the right side of the steering column shroud in the instrument panel. This switch has four positions marked as 0, 1, 2 & 3.
Switch Position
Vehicle Loading Condition
0
Driver/Driver with Front Passenger
1
Driver + Front passenger + Second row occupied
2
All seats occupied
3
All seats occupied with luggage OR Driver with luggage at extreme rear side
Select the suitable switch position depending on the pay loading condition as advised in the table.
The headlights can only be adjusted when the low beam is switched ON.
8.11.3 Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) / Rear Park Lamp (If Equipped)
To enable DRL/Rear Park Lamp: In daytime whenever the vehicle is in running and park lamp switch is in OFF position, DRL / Rear Park Lamp is enabled.
To disable DRL: Whenever the vehicle is in running and park lamp is ON, DRL will get switch to park mode.
If customer doesn’t want the DRL / Rear Park Lamp to be ON, he can disable through infotainment settings.
8.11.4 Rear Defogging
There are heating grids on the tailgate glass. Be careful not to damage the heating grids while cleaning inside of the tailgate window.
Do not coat the tailgate window with commercial anti-glare film. When the metal anti-glare film and two-tone anti-glare film is used, the sensitivity of the heating grids can be deteriorated.
If any transmitter or receiver is close to the antenna, it can interfere with the communication of the antenna.
The heating element of the glass is activated only when the engine is ON. When the glass heater switch is pressed, the heating elements of the rear windshield and outside rearview mirrors are turned on simultaneously.
8.12 Hazard Warning Lamp
The hazard warning lamp switch is in the center bezel switch bank on the instrument panel.
Graphic
Press this switch to turn ON the Hazard Warning Lamp. All the Turn Signal Lamps will start flashing. The instrument cluster turn indicator lamps also flash indicating the same. To turn OFF, push the switch again.
Use the hazard warning lamp when your vehicle is stationary or to warn other road users to be cautious while passing your vehicle.
The turn lamps will work when the hazard warning lamps are operational.
8.13 Auto Hazard Warning Lamp
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically during bonnet open in vehicle stationary condition.
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically for 10 seconds during panic braking condition to indicate oncoming traffic.
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically in case of an unfortunate event of an accident where airbags are deployed. In such a scenario, the hazard lamps will be on for 30 minutes or it can be turned off by operating Hazard switch (OFF to ON) or Ignition reset (Ignition OFF and ON)
8.14 Follow-Me Home (FMH) with Rain Light Sensor (RLS) (If Equipped)
This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get out of the vehicle during poor light conditions. The head lamp low beam is turned ON for about 20 seconds, assisting the passengers to find their way unless cancelled by the UNLOCK signal from the RKE.
To enable FMH;
•  Ignition transition from ON to OFF
•  Park lamp is OFF
•  Ignition key is out
•  Driver door open within 3 minute from KEY OUT
•  Head lamp would turn ON only if the ambience light is found dark by the light sensor
To extend FMH:
•  The first RKE / PKE LOCK command will be used for locking all doors.
•  Successive RKE / PKE LOCK commands will be used for toggling the current status of the head lamp low beam.
•  Each time FMH is extended the head lamp low beam will be kept/turned on for the next 20 second.
To disable FMH:
•  Park lamp transition from OFF to ON
•  Ignition off to any other state
•  FMH ON 20 second expires
•  FMH Max time is 3 minute expires
With FMH mode ON, if the UNLOCK signal is received twice from RKE; the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further. Also, the doors are unlocked.
8.15 Lead Me to Vehicle Lamp (LMV) (If Equipped)
LMV is the feature that will switch ON the head lamp for 20 second helping the passengers to reach the parked vehicle safely and comfortably at night.
LMV is activated:
•  Pressing the unlock button on the RKE two times.
LMV is de-activated:
•  Switch ON the parking lamps.
•  Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position.
•  Press both the lock and unlock buttons on your RKE fob at the same time, just once.
•  Head lamp switches ON for 20 second and switched OFF automatically.
To extend the LMV feature further for 20 second, press RKE UNLOCK button once. This LMV extension can be availed for maximum 3 minute from the first activation.
With LMV mode ON; First UNLOCK signal received from RKE will unlock the doors and subsequent UNLOCK signal is used to toggle the head lamp ON and OFF.
8.16 Windshield Wipers
8.16.1 Wiper Control Stalk
Graphic
A: Flick- Wipe (MIST)
B: Off
C: Intermittent (INT)/AUTO
D: Low Speed (LO)
E: High Speed (HI)
F: Rotary Switch
Wiper Off: The wipe function is OFF when the wiper control stalk is in neutral position (B).
Flick-Wipe (Mist): Push the wipe control stalk to position (A) for a flick-wipe, hold to operate the wipe continuously (simultaneously lift the wiper stalk towards the steering wheel to operate the wash). The stalk automatically comes back to position (B) when released.
Intermittent (INT) (If Equipped):Intermittent (INT) mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position (C). In the INT mode, the wiper operates on preset intervals. The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).
Auto Mode (If Equipped): Auto mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position C. In the AUTO mode, the wiper operates based on rain intensity.
The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).
When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the wiper will automatically operate once if the wiper switch is turned from the “OFF” to the “AUTO” position.
Low Speed Wiping: Push the wipe control stalk down to the position (D) to operate the wiper at a fixed low speed.
High Speed Wiping: Push the wiper control stalk down to position (E) to operate the wiper at a fixed high speed.
8.16.2 Wipe/Wash
Pull/Lift the wiper control stalk towards the steering wheel from any position to activate wipe/wash function. Washer fluid from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield. The wipers wipe the windshield 3 times after the washer spray is stopped. Hold the stalk in position for continuous spray of washer fluid.
Graphic
When wiper is in OFF or Intermittent mode:
After completion of the wipe/wash cycle, wipers return to their bottom position.
If the wipers are in Intermittent mode and DWELL delay is less than or equal to 5 second, then the wiper will continue in the Intermittent mode.
If the wipers are in Intermittent mode, and DWELL delay is more than 5 second, then a further single wipe will be performed 5 second after the wash/wipe cycle. After the drip wipe (last wipe), wiper returns to normal Intermittent wipe.
The wipe/wash function can be activated only when the ignition is in “ON” position.
8.16.3 AUTO Wash (If Equipped)
Graphic
When auto washer switch is pressed once, washer fluid from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield for 2 second. The wipers wipe the windshield 4 times.
After that, again Washer fluid from front washer motor will turn ON for 1.5 second and the wipers wipe the windshield 3 times.
AUTO wash function will work only when the wiper switch is in OFF mode.
8.16.4 Rear Wiper-INT Mode
Graphic
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to align the “arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position to operate the rear wiper in INT mode. In this mode, the wiper operates on preset intervals of 4 second.
8.16.5 Rear Wiper-ON Mode
Graphic
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to align the “arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position to operate the rear wiper continuously.
8.16.6 Rear Wash
Graphic
Push the wiper control stalk towards back side from any position to activate wipe/wash function. The rear windshield wash & wipe operates 3 to 4 times or as long as the stalk end is Push/Pull to the rear wash position. Wiping will continue for 3 times after releasing the stalk end switch.
If you switch OFF the ignition before switching OFF the wiper, the blades stop at random on the windshield. Switch ON the ignition and move wiper stalk to ‘MIST’ position to return the wipers to the park position, provided the wiper stalk is in OFF position.
Using a windshield washer in freezing temperatures could be dangerous. The washer fluid could freeze on the windshield, and block your vision resulting in an accident. If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 °C, use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection.
•  Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry. It may lead to scratches on the glass.
•  It is recommended not to use the wiper when the windshield glass is covered with debris, snow or leaves. Clean the glass before using the wiper to avoid damage to the wiper blades and glass.
•  Do not operate the windshield washer for more than 10 second or when the reservoir is empty.
8.16.7 Windshield Washer Jet - Front & Rear
There are two nozzles with triple adjustable washer jets in the front (on the cowl cover). Using a pin, the eye ball jets can be adjusted precisely for direction. Always direct the washer jet to hit the middle of the windshield. This will enable the wiper blade to wipe the complete width of the windshield.
Graphic
In the rear, one nozzle provided for the rear windshield wash. Rear windshield washer fluid is supplied from front washer reservoir located in the motor compartment.
8.17 Sunroof (If Equipped)
Sunroof makes the driving experience more enjoyable by bringing more day light into the vehicle.
It enhances the fun of driving, with fresh air, It provides a more relaxed driving experience.
It allows air to flow evenly from above the driver, which is much quieter and less intrusive than wind blowing through a side window.
•  Even though the sunroof can be operated when the ignition key is in the ON position (the engine is not running), operating the sunroof repeatedly with the engine turned off will run down the battery. Operate the sunroof while the engine is running.
•  When a desired sunroof operation is completed, release the switch. If you keep pressing the switch, it could cause a malfunction. Especially in winter, never operate the sunroof if moving areas are iced. Wait until the areas are deiced.
•  When leaving the vehicle unattended, be sure to completely close the sunroof. Otherwise, there is a great risk of vehicle theft. Or the interior of the vehicle will be wet when it rains or snows.
•  When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions before operation. Parts of the body can be trapped.
•  Clean up the circumference of sunroof regularly. Otherwise, operating the sunroof may cause a noise due to foreign material and dirt.
•  Opening the sunroof or driving with the sunroof open after a car wash or rain may lead to water entering.
•  Close the sunroof while driving in the dusty environment. The dusts or particles entered can cause operating problems.
•  If a roof rack system is installed on the vehicle roof or any cargo is secured to the roof rack, do not operate the sunroof. If you are required to operate the sunroof, carefully check that the roof rack system does not interfere with the sunroof and it is safe to open the sunroof.
•  Make sure that no passenger sticks out head, hand or any part of his/her body out of the sunroof opening while driving. There is a risk of personal injury when the vehicle is stopped suddenly.
•  Before operating the sunroof, make sure that no head, hand, finger, or any object is capable of being trapped. There is a risk of personal injury or even death.
Parking, stopping, or passing the vehicle intentionally or unintentionally under a waterfall or other extreme high-pressure water sources may cause water leakage into the cabin, impacting the functionality of the sunroof.
Disclaimer:
Such scenario will be classified as vehicle abuse. Any damages, malfunctions, or other consequences resulting from exposure to such high-pressure water sources, including waterfalls, will not be covered under the warranty.
Sunroof Cover: The sunroof cover opens and closes manually.
Graphic
8.17.1 Sunroof Sliding Operation
Open: 2-Step Opening
Graphic
Graphic
2-step auto sliding open: Push up the switch, hold for more than 1 second and then release it.
Step 1 (First Stage): When Pushing up the switch, hold for more than 1 second and then release it, the sunroof is automatically opened by two-third of its travel (First Step).
Step 2 (Second Stage): When Pushing up the switch, hold for more than 1 second and then release it again, the sunroof is completely opened (Second Step).
If the switch is pushed momentarily or less than 1 second and released, the sunroof will open in manual mode and switch has to be pressed continuously for full open or up till any other desired location.
Close
Graphic
Graphic
Auto sliding close: Pull down the switch, hold for more than 1 second and then release it for.
When pulling down the switch, hold for more than 1 second and then release it, the sunroof is automatically closed completely. To stop the sunroof, pull or push switch at desired position while moving.
If the switch is pulled momentarily or less than 1 second and released, the sunroof will close in manual mode and switch has to be pulled down continuously for full close or up till any other desired location.
To stop the sunroof, pull or push the switch at desired position while moving.
The sunroof is closed by repeating the action to achieve desired positions.
8.17.2 Sunroof Tilting Operation
Graphic
Tilt UP: The rear side of the sunroof is tilted up when pulling down the sunroof switch with the sunroof closed.
Tilt DOWN: The rear side of the sunroof is tilted down when pushing up the sunroof switch with the sunroof tilted up.
Anti-Pinch Function (If Equipped)
Graphic
To prevent any body parts from being trapped by the sliding sunroof, an Anti-Pinch Function automatically opens the sunroof when an object is trapped.
•  This safety function is available for the auto sliding sunroof close.
•  The anti-pinch function is deactivated just before the sunroof closes.
•  Sunroof safety function is supplemental and not always operable depending on circumstances (e.g. any electrical device in the vehicle, etc.), therefore, the driver should check safety at all times before operating the sunroof.
When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions before operation. Parts of the body can be trapped.
Do not stick out any part of your body out of the sunroof even in stationary.
Improper use of the power sunroof can result in serious personal injury.
•  Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle – particularly if they have access to the vehicle key. Unsupervised use of the remote control vehicle key makes it possible to lock the vehicle, turn on the ignition, start the engine and operate the sunroof.
•  Never stand or sit on sunroof glasses or roof. This can cause severe damage and would be treated as abuse of the sunroof which not covered by warranty.
•  Never keep the luggage / weights on top of the roof/sunroof.
•  Any wet area found on the headliner shall be reported an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
•  Never close the sunshade during the sunroof glass is in open condition. This can cause the sunshade damage and would be treated as abuse of the sunroof which not covered by warranty.
•  Without pinch protection, the power Sunroof will close with enough force to cause serious personal injury.
•  Always be careful when closing the power sunroof.
•  Pinch protection cannot prevent fingers or other parts of the body from being pressed against the edge of the roof; may result in injuries.
•  If the power Sunroof malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. Visit a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
Wind Buffeting: When you drive this vehicle with the window or sunroof open at a certain position, you may feel some pressure upon your ears or hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter. This happens because of an influx in air through the window or sunroof and its resonance effect. If this happens, adjust by opening the window or sunroof.
Initialization and Self Learning Procedure
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Condition for Re-Initialization and Self-Learning Procedure:
•  After the fitment of Sunroof onto the vehicle body, it must be re-initialized.
•  Whenever the sunroof motor is removed and refitted or replaced without sunroof removal from vehicle.
•  Whenever the sunroof glass assembly is removed and refitted or replaced without sunroof removal from vehicle.
•  In some cases, if the vehicle battery has been disconnected during sunroof movement and reconnected or is dead or replace the fuse, the sunroof must be initialized. Otherwise, Express function (open/close/tilt) and pinch protection function will be deactivated.
•  If the sunroof is stopped midway due to a discharged battery or power failure.
•  The sunroof does not completely close or open by operating the switch once.
•  The sunroof slides back to close. But the operation does not stop even after a complete close and tilts up the sunroof.
•  The opening gap remarkably decreases for the sliding open or tilt up.
•  The sunshade does not work.
•  Operation of the sunroof switch does not do anything or work properly.
•  The operating process is not same as before due to discharged or disconnected battery.
Initializing Procedure
To initialize the sliding sunroof, use the following procedure.
Turn ON the ignition.
Sunroof to be in TILT position. Pull down the ‘sunroof operating switch’ and hold it for more than 10 second and release it. During this process, Sunroof tilts  slightly upwards and return to its tilt position. A jerky glass movement is observed this indicates the completion of INITIALIZATION.
After INITIALIZATION process is completed, a SELF LEARNING PROCESS needs to be executed within less than 4 second.
1. If the initialization procedure is not completely performed, then it must be run again from step 2.
2. If tilt function is not happening in step 2, then sunroof to be followed reset and Initialization Procedure.
Self-Learning Procedure
•  Sliding sunroof shall be in TILT position after initialization.
•  Pull down the ‘sunroof operating switch’ and hold it continuously. Do not release the switch and wait for following actions to perform.
•  Sunroof will start its cycle less than 5 second.
•  Sunroof start to self-learning, run from Tilt - Close - Open – Close.
•  Overall, approx. 14 to 20 second @13.5V required to complete self-learning.
•  The Self-learning command is complete.
1. Self-learning procedure can be done only after the Initialization procedure.
2. Self-learning procedure needs to start within 4 second after Initialization, if not started within 4 second, then initialization procedure to be performed again.
3. If the switch is released in-between the self-learning procedure, then initialization procedure to be performed again.
Reset & Initialization Procedure
To Reset & initialization the sunroof, use the following procedure.
The sunroof to be in fully open condition.
Push up the sunroof operating switch and hold for more than 10 second and then release for reset.
Pull down the switch and hold to complete the cycle, run from Close (glass moves step by step) – Tilt up – Tilt upwards slightly – Tilt Position.
The sunroof reset & initialization procedure was completed.
Overall, approx. 20 to 22 second @13.5V required to complete reset & re-initialization.
Continue the self-learning procedure within less than 4 second.
If the reset procedure is not completely performed, then it must be run again from step 1. (Reset function not happened can be identified, by glass not closing step by step during the procedure).
•  To help prevent damage, remove ice and snow from the sunroof before opening or tilting it in winter season.
•  Always close the sunroof before leaving the vehicle or if it begins to rain. If the sunroof is open or tilted, rain could enter the vehicle interior and cause extensive damage to the electrical system. This could result in further vehicle damage.
•  Remove leaves and other objects from the Sunroof guide rails regularly either by hand or using a vacuum cleaner.
•  If the power sunroof malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. See a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
•  During sliding sunroof (auto/manual) open operation, the sunshade will also open in synchronization with sliding sunroof glass.
•  During sliding sunroof (auto/manual) close operation, the sunshade will not close in synchronization with sliding sunroof glass.
Do not remove vehicle battery while sunroof is in motion
8.17.3 Sunroof Service Checking Procedure
•  Open the Sunroof.
Graphic
•  Check all 4 rail channel corners for mud or dust/leaf present in it.
Graphic
•  Move the leafs/dust to centre of rain channel and then remove it by hand.
Do not blow air in drain hose channel before cleaning it manually – as the bigger leaves may go inside and block drain hose.
Graphic
•  After cleaning of all visible particles, blow air into drain hose channel area to clean hose for mud in this area.
•  Now pour 1 litre of water in rain channel and check if water is draining or not.
If water is not draining kindly contact the Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
High Pressure washer nozzle jets should not be directed towards Sunroof seals.
Do not use High pressure water on Sunroof area.
It is recommended to wipe the seals with damp micro-fiber cloth during cleaning.
Sunroof rails and drain area should be cleaned using air blower.
8.18 Skyroof (If Equipped)
Graphic
Skyroof will make the driving experience more enjoyable by bringing light and sunshine into the vehicle.
It provides a real open air feeling along with pure driving fun, with fresh air, your driving experience automatically becomes significantly more relaxed.
Skyroof allows air to flow evenly from above the driver, which is much quieter and less intrusive than wind blowing through a side window.
•  Even though the skyroof can be operated when the ignition key is in the ON position (the engine is not running), operating the skyroof repeatedly with the engine turned off will run down the battery. Operate the skyroof while the engine is running.
•  When a desired skyroof operation is completed, release the switch. If you keep pressing the switch, it could cause a malfunction. Especially in winter, never operate the skyroof if moving areas are iced. Wait until the areas are deiced.
•  When leaving the vehicle unattended, be sure to completely close the skyroof. Otherwise, there is a great risk of vehicle theft. Or the interior of the vehicle will be wet when it rains or snows.
•  When operating the skyroof, be aware of safety conditions before operation. Parts of the body can be trapped.
•  Clean up the circumference of skyroof regularly. Otherwise, operating the skyroof may cause a noise due to foreign material and dirt.
•  Opening the skyroof or driving with the skyroof open after a car wash or rain may lead to water entering.
•  Close the skyroof while driving in the dusty environment. The dusts or particles entered can cause operating problems.
•  If a roof rack system is installed on the vehicle roof or any cargo is secured to the roof rack, do not operate the skyroof. If you are required to operate the skyroof, carefully check that the roof rack system does not interfere with the skyroof and it is safe to open the skyroof.
•  Make sure that no passenger sticks out head, hand or any part of his/her body out of the skyroof opening while driving. There is a risk of personal injury when the vehicle is stopped suddenly.
•  Before operating the skyroof, make sure that no head, hand, finger, or any object is capable of being trapped. There is a risk of personal injury or even death.
Parking, stopping, or passing the vehicle intentionally or unintentionally under a waterfall or other extreme high-pressure water sources may cause water leakage into the cabin, impacting the functionality of the sunroof.
Disclaimer:
Such scenario will be classified as vehicle abuse. Any damages, malfunctions, or other consequences resulting from exposure to such high-pressure water sources, including waterfalls, will not be covered under the warranty.
8.18.1 Controls and functions
Graphic
Switch Position
Switch Press
Operation
0
–
Switch Home / Neutral Position
1
Short Press
Tilt Open
2
Short Press
Skyroof Express Open
Long Press
Skyroof Manual Open
3
Short Press
Tilt Close / Skyroof Express Close
Long Press
Tilt Close / Skyroof Manual Close
4
Short Press
Tilt Close / Skyroof Express Close
Long Press
Tilt Close / Skyroof Manual Close
5
Short Press
Rollo Shade Express Open
Long Press
Rollo Shade Manual Open
6
Short Press
Rollo Shade Express Close
Long Press
Rollo Shade Manual Close
Toggle switch for the skyroof to operate. Home/neutral position of the Switch (0). To operate the sliding skyroof and rollo shade close or open or tilt the switch as shown in image, after every operation switch goes to Home position automatically.
You must switch ON the ignition to operate the skyroof.
8.18.2 Rollo Shade Open
Graphic
Press the open switch to position (5) for rollo shade express (short press) open. Manual (long press) open to stop at desired position.
8.18.3 Rollo Shade Close
Graphic
Push the close switch to position (6) for rollo shade express (short press) close. Manual (long press) close to stop at desired position.
8.18.4 Skyroof Open
Graphic
•  Push up the switch to position (2) for skyroof express (short press) open. Manual (long press) open to stop at desired position.
•  Skyroof will open followed by rollo shade open.
-
•  Pull down the switch to position (3) or (4) to stop at desired position while opening.
Skyroof Smart Open by Key Fob Unlock Button
Graphic
•  Skyroof and rollo shade can be opened by long press unlock button.
•  Skyroof will open followed by rollo shade open.
•  Skyroof / rollo shade movement can be stopped by pressing lock/unlock button during movement.
8.18.5 Skyroof Close
Graphic
•  Pull down the switch to position (3) or (4) for skyroof express (Short Press) close. Manual (long press) close to stop at desired position.
•  Rollo shade will not be closed followed by skyroof.
•  Push up the switch to position (2) to stop at desired position while closing.
Skyroof Smart Close by Key fob Lock button
Graphic
•  Skyroof and rollo shade can be close by long press lock button.
•  Rollo shade will be closed followed by skyroof.
•  Skyroof/rollo shade movement can be stop by pressing lock/ unlock button during movement
If anti-pinch is detected 3 times, the one touch close function deactivated and skyroof to be close manually by pull down the switch (Position 4) continuously till fully close. After fully close the one touch function is activated.
Skyroof Smart Close while Raining
Graphic
If rain sensor is equipped: In auto wipe mode or wiper LOW or HIGH mode, when wiper is ON for predefined time, cluster will request user feedback for closing the skyroof. Using steering “selection button/ center button” user can choose to close the skyroof.
In the RLS variant, the skyroof and rollo shade will automatically close when rain is detected.
This detection will start after 5 minute once ignition is turned OFF.
If the vehicle remains in the ignition OFF and locked state for 12 hour, the skyroof and rollo shade will automatically close as an additional safety measure.
Graphic
•  In Non-Rain sensor variant, once wiper is turned ON for a predefined time, cluster will request user feedback for closing the skyroof using steering switch button, user can close the skyroof.
Skyroof Smart Control by Voice Recognition
Graphic
User can open and close skyroof via Voice command through Alexa during Ignition ON.
8.18.6 Skyroof Control by Authorised Mobile Phone Application
Graphic
User can open and close skyroof via mobile phone with authorized application in Ignition OFF.
8.18.7 Skyroof Tilt Open/Close
Graphic
Tilt Up
Push Up the switch to position (1) for skyroof tilt open from the skyroof closed condition.
Skyroof will tilt open followed by rollo shade half open.
Tilt Down
Pull down the switch to position (3) or (4) for skyroof tilt close from skyroof tilt open condition.
Rollo shade will not be closed followed by skyroof close.
8.18.8 Anti Pinch Function (If Equipped)
To prevent any body parts from being trapped by the skyroof/rollo shade, an Anti-Pinch Function automatically opens the skyroof/rollo shade when an object is trapped.
•  This safety function is available for the skyroof and rollo shade.
•  The anti-pinch function is deactivated just before the skyroof / rollo shade closes.
•  Skyroof / rollo shade safety function is supplemental and not always operable depending on circumstances (e.g. any electrical device in the vehicle, etc.), therefore, the driver should check safety at all times operating the skyroof / rollo shade.
•  When operating the skyroof, be aware of safety conditions before operation. Parts of the body can be trapped.
•  Do not stick out any part of your body out of the skyroof even in stationary.
•  Improper use of the skyroof can result in serious personal injury.
•  Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle – particularly if they have access to the vehicle key.
•  Unsupervised use of the remote-control vehicle key makes it possible to lock the vehicle, start the engine, turn on the ignition and operate the skyroof.
•  Never stand or sit on skyroof or roof. This can cause severe damage and would be treated as abuse of the skyroof which not covered by warranty.
•  Never keep the luggage / weights on top of the roof/ skyroof.
•  Any wet area found on the headliner shall be reported an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
•  Without pinch protection, the power skyroof / rollo shade will close with enough force to cause serious personal injury.
•  Always be careful when closing the skyroof /rollo shade. Pinch protection cannot prevent fingers or other parts of the body from being pressed against the edge of the roof; may result in injuries.
•  If the skyroof / rollo shade malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. Visit a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
8.18.9 Emergency Close Feature
The express (One Touch) / Manual (long press) skyroof Close function may not work due to:
•  Consecutive several attempts to close skyroof and rollo Shade.
•  Pinch protection is only for closing skyroof and rollo shade.
•  Excessive Ice / Dirt accumulation on the skyroof glass / guide rails.
Follow the emergency close command as below:
•  Emergency close feature can be used, if Sliding skyroof or rollo shade consecutive reversal movement observed 3 times then continue with step 2 as below to use Emergency close feature.
•  On the 4th attempt continuously Pull the skyroof close switch to position (4) until it closes completely to ensure occupant privacy, safety & theft prevention from skyroof open window. This is Emergency Close Feature.
•  Once the skyroof or rollo Shade is completely closed, release the switch.
•  Alternatively, User may wait for min. 30 seconds before operating skyroof and rollo Shade, then skyroof can be operated with Normal Functions.
•  If the skyroof doesn’t operate as above, Contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
8.18.10 Wind Buffeting
When you drive the vehicle with the window or skyroof open at a certain position, you may feel some pressure upon your ears or hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter. This happens because of an influx of in air through the window or skyroof and due to its resonance effect. If this happens, adjust by opening the window or skyroof.
8.18.11 Initializing The Power Skyroof
Conditions for Initialization & Self-Learning Procedure :
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected during skyroof / rollo shade movement and reconnected or it is dead or any fuse is replaced, the skyroof / rollo shade must be initialized. Otherwise Express (one touch) function (open/close/tilt) and pinch protection function will be deactivated.
•  After the fitment of skyroof onto the vehicle body, it must be initialized.
•  Whenever the skyroof motors are removed and refitted or replaced without skyroof removal from vehicle.
•  Whenever the skyroof glasses is removed and refitted or replaced without skyroof removal from vehicle.
•  In some cases, if the vehicle battery has been disconnected during sliding skyroof / rollo shade movement and reconnected or is dead or replace the fuse, the skyroof must be initialized. Otherwise, Express (one touch) function (open/close/tilt) and pinch protection function will be deactivated.
•  If the skyroof/rollo shade is stopped midway due to a discharged battery or power failure.
•  The skyroof/rollo shade does not completely close or open by operating the switch once.
•  The skyroof slides back to close. But the operation does not stop even after a complete close and tilts up the sliding skyroof.
•  The opening gap remarkably decreases for the sliding open or tilt up.
•  The skyroof/rollo shade does not work.
•  Operation of the skyroof switch does not do anything or work properly.
•  The operating process is not same as before due to discharged or disconnected battery.
Initializing command procedure:
To initialize the skyroof & rolloshade, use the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the ignition(Pre condition shall be close position for both skyroof and rollo shade).
2. Skyroof and rollo shade to be in fully closed position. Pull down the ‘Skyroof close switch’ to position (4) and hold it for more than 10 second and release it. During this process, skyroof & rollo shade moves slightly beyond and returns to fully closed position in a very short time.
3. Initialization is completed.
4. Continue the self-learning procedure within less than 4 second.
If the initializing procedure is not completely performed, then it has to be run again from step 2.
If there is no automatic action of skyroof and rollo shade over 5 second, the teaching has been failed, then it must be run again from step 2.
If skyroof and rollo shade movement not happening in step 2, then reset & initialization procedure to be followed.
8.18.12 Self Learning The Power Skyroof
Self learning command procedure:
1. Sliding Skyroof & Rollo shade shall be in CLOSED position after initialization.
2. Pull down the ‘Skyroof close switch’ to position (4) and hold it continuously. Do not release the switch and wait for following actions to perform.
3. Skyroof will start its cycle less than 5 second.
4. Skyroof start to self-learning, run from Rollo shade CLOSE -> OPEN, Sliding Skyroof CLOSE -> TILT -> OPEN - > CLOSE, Rollo shade OPEN-> CLOSE.
5. Overall, approx. 25 to 30 second @13.5V required to complete self-learning.
6. The Self learning command is complete.
Incase skyroof and Rollo Shade Close switch is released in the middle of procedure, repeat from step 1.
•  Self-learning procedure can be done only after the Initialization procedure.
•  Self-learning procedure need to start within 4 seconds after Initialization, if not started within 4 second, then again initialization procedure to be performed.
•  If the switch released in-between the self-learning procedure, then again initialization procedure to be performed.
8.18.13 Reset & Initialization Procedure
To Reset & Initialization the Skyroof, use the following procedure.
1. The skyroof/rollo shade to be in fully open condition.
2. Push up the skyroof operating switch to position (2) and hold for more than 10 second and then release for reset.
3. Pull down the switch to position (4) and hold to complete the cycle, run from Open (Skyroof & Rollo shade moves step by step) –> Close Position.
4. The skyroof reset & initialization procedure was completed.
5. Overall, approx. 45 second @13.5V required to complete reset and re-initialization.
6. Continue the self-learning procedure within less than 4 second.
If the reset procedure is not completely performed, then it must be run again from step 1. (Reset function not happened can be identified, by skyroof & rollo shade not closing step by step during the procedure).
•  To help prevent damage, remove ice and snow from the skyroof before opening or tilting it in winter season.
•  Always close the skyroof before leaving the vehicle or if it begins to rain. If the skyroof is open or tilted, rain could enter the vehicle interior and cause extensive damage to the electrical system. This could result in further vehicle damage.
•  Remove leaves and other objects from the skyroof guiderails regularly either by hand or using a vacuum cleaner.
•  If the skyroof / rollo shade malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. See a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
•  The rollo shade can be opened and closed independently when the sliding skyroof is in closed position.
•  During sliding skyroof express (one touch) open/tilt operation, rollo shade will also open in synchronization with sliding skyroof (Express - Complete Open Feature).
•  During sliding skyroof express (one touch) close operation, rollo Shade will not close in synchronization with sliding skyroof.
Do not remove vehicle battery while skyroof is in motion.
8.18.14 Skyroof Service Checking Procedure
Graphic
•  Open the skyroof.
•  Check all 4 rail channel corners for mud or dust/ leaf present in it.
Graphic
•  Move the leafs/Dust to center of rain channel and then remove it by hand.
Do not blow air in drain hose channel before cleaning it manually – as the bigger leaves may go inside and block drain hose.
Graphic
•  After cleaning of all visible particles blow air into drain hose channel area to clean hose for mud in this area.
•  Now pour 1 liter of water in rain channel and check if water is draining or not.
If water is not draining kindly contact the Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
•  High Pressure washer nozzle jets should not be directed towards skyroof seals and rubber components.
•  Do not use High pressure water on skyroof area.
•  It is recommended to wipe the seals with damp micro fiber cloth during cleaning.
•  Skyroof rails and drain area should be cleaned using air blower.
8.19 Skyroof Smart Close and Open
8.19.1 Smart operations in Ignition OFF State
a). Using PKE/RKE Key Fob
•  Skyroof Smart Close- During ignition off with all doors closed, if the key fob lock button is pressed for more than 1 second, then doors will get locked and skyroof will get closed automatically.
•  Skyroof Smart Open- During ignition off, if the key fob unlock button is pressed for more than 1 second, then doors will get unlocked and skyroof will be opened along with blower ON in fresh air mode (for approximately 40 second).
If any of the doors status is not changed for 45 seconds, doors will get locked, skyroof will get closed.
b). Using Adrenox Command
Adrenox command will work only when
1. Ignition is off and
2. Doors in locked state and
3. Key fob is not inside the vehicle
Vehicle Controls
Graphic
Skyroof Smart Open/ Close
Graphic
Graphic
User set PIN will be required to execute AdrenoX commands.
c). Timer Based Control (Applicable only for RLS variants)
Skyroof Smart Close - During ignition off, if Skyroof is open for more than a predefined time (for approximately 12 hour), skyroof and rollo shade will get closed automatically.
d). Rain detection based control (Applicable only for RLS variants)
Skyroof Smart Close - During ignition off and doors are in locked condition, If rain is detected skyroof and rollo shade will be automatically closed.
8.19.2 Smart operations in Ignition ON State
a). Using Alexa Voice Command
User can open and close Skyroof via voice command through Alexa during Ignition ON.
. .Alexa, Open Skyroof....... .Alexa, close skyroof.
b). While Wiper is ON
Skyroof Smart Close- During ignition ON condition, if front wiper is ON for approximately around 10 second (varies based on wiper modes), a notification requesting user confirmation for closing the skyroof will be displayed. On confirming the same, both will be closed.
Graphic
9 PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM
9.1 Rear View Camera (RVC) (If Equipped)
Graphic
Rear View Camera is located near rear bumper of the vehicle.
Rear View Camera assists the driver while reversing and manoeuvring the vehicle at lower speeds. It has the following features:
1. Normal Rear View
2. Static and Dynamic Guidelines
9.1.1 Feature Description
1. Normal Rear View
By selecting view icon, rear view camera provides view of vehicle’s rear surrounding on the Infotainment screen.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
It overcomes limitation of IRVM, where ground is visible only after longer distance from vehicle rear. Whereas with the RVC, the ground will be visible closer to the vehicle’s rear.
2. Static and Dynamic Guidelines
Guidelines shall assist the driver in understanding the position/placement of the vehicle with respect to the surroundings by displaying overlays with representation for the ego vehicle movement when driven straight and when driven in a path.
Dynamic Guidelines indicate path, the vehicle will traverse with current steering position.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
This will help the driver in adjusting the steering, towards hitting any obstacles.
Colour coding on the Static guideline help in assessing the distance of obstacle from the vehicles’ rear. In the RVC Video, red coloured section of static line falls on a object, then the object is within 0.5 meter distance from the vehicle’s rear. Likewise, amber indicates till 1 meter, Green indicates 1-2 meter.
9.1.2 Entry and Exit Conditions
Entry Conditions
Whenever you apply the reverse gear, the infotainment will enter into ‘Rear View Camera Mode’ and displays the video with close button.
You can view reverse video without close button, by selecting Reverse View Camera option present on infotainment screen, irrespective of the gear position.
Below is the path: App drawer >> Reverse View Camera.
Rear view screen when enter through infotainment displays video with close button, then again when reverse gear is engaged rear view without close button will be displayed.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
You cannot enter RVC Mode, through the infotainment screen button, if the vehicle is in forward gear and vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h.
Exit Conditions
•  Infotainment has entered ‘RVC Mode’ due to reverse gear, then when driver disengages reverse gear then rear view mode will be closed and infotainment home screen will be opened.
•  Infotainment has entered ‘RVC Mode’, due to reverse camera selection present on the infotainment, then RVC mode can be exited, by selecting the cancel button appearing on the screen.
•  RVC Mode is exited, whenever vehicle is in forward gear and vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h.
9.1.3 Camera Maintenance
Always keep the Camera lens clean from dust. Presence of dirt on lens may lead to poor image quality.
Always use clear water and soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the lens.
Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera with a power washer.
•  In case of any RVC-related issues, the Infotainment shall display ‘Please Contact Service Centre’ and vehicle needs to be taken to the Authorized Mahindra Service Center. Avoid using the rear-view camera under these circumstances.
Graphic
Graphic
•  If rear of your vehicle is damaged or if the camera position is changed, please contact the nearest a Authorized Mahindra Service Center, for recalibrating the Camera.
9.1.4 System Limitations
•  Reverse view camera may not operate normally, when you drive in the extremely high or low temperature area. (Operating temperature: -20 °C ~ 65 °C).
•  Under certain circumstances given below, the rear view camera system will work with limitation or will not function fully:
- In heavy rain, snow or fog.
- At night or in very dark places.
- If the camera is exposed to very bright light sources.
- Display may flicker, if the camera area is lit by LED or fluorescent lighting.
•  If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot areas.
•  If the camera lens got dirty or obstructed.
•  If the rear of your vehicle got damaged. And if the Camera position and the settings got changed. Please contact the nearest a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
•  Camera image reproduced slightly delayed and not in real time due to processing. As the display is 2-dimensional, pointed and protruding obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult to recognise. Please avoid reverse view camera in the above situation. It could you otherwise injure others or damage objects and your vehicle.
•  The performance gets affected sometimes due to deposition of ice, dust, heavy rain, heavy wind, heavy exhaust on the camera.
•  Images shown on the display is a mirror-inverted manner, as like the rearview mirror. Make sure that no persons or animals and any objects/materials are in the manoeuvring area. Pay attention and ensure safety before manoeuvring the car. Driver is legally responsible for their car.
•  The reverse view camera is only a supplementary function and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective and inaccurately.
•  Avoid using of rear view camera, if you are having eye colour blindness or impaired colour vision.
•  Objects above the ground or hanged may appear to be far away than they are. But in reality, objects shall be closer to your car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines to judge the distance. Since it leads to misalignment and increase the risk of collision with your car.
•  It is driver’s responsibility to identify the suitable parking area to park his vehicle safely.
•  Rear view video is shown, whenever reverse gear is applied, but it cannot be used as a rear view monitoring system, which cannot replace the driver for looking into exterior and interior view mirrors.
Rear View Camera is only meant to aid the driver and to enhance convenience while parking. It does not in any way replace the driver’s abilities and driving skills while using this system. Under any circumstances, Mahindra accepts no responsibility and cannot be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.
9.2 Reverse Parking Assistance System (RPAS)
Reverse parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver while parking the vehicle in reverse at a speed of less than 8 km/h. While reversing, RPAS will detect the obstacles at the rear side of the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed through the internal rear-view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors. The RPAS will then alert the driver by a beep sound and display about the location of the detected obstacle. The alert sound level will vary proportional to the distance. Smaller the distance shorter the interval between the beeps.
Graphic
Two PAS sensors are located in the rear bumper and two sensors are located in front Bumper to assist driver for hassle free parking
RPAS will give proper alerts at vehicle speed less than 8 km/h.
Always keep the sensors clean and free from ice formation, dust, water etc. for proper working of the system.
Do not press or shock the sensors by hitting or using a high-pressure water gun while washing. The sensors could be damaged.
Magnetic devices present in the detection range could vastly affect the sensor performance and the distance displayed may not be accurate.
Driving and Operation
•  RPAS is an aiding system. Under no circumstances Mahindra will accept any responsibility or can be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.
•  System will not sense pot holes, trenches or drainages which are below the ground level.
•  Repainting of the sensor will affect the performance of the system.
Activation and De-activation of RPAS
•  The Vehicle should be in IGN ON state to activate the parking assistance system.
•  RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and hand brake is disengaged.
•  RPAS will be deactivated when reverse gear is disengaged or hand brake is engaged.
•  When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the system starts giving the indication based on the distance and direction of the obstacles as defined in the detecting zones. The closer the obstacles, more display bars illuminated and beeps alerts.
RPAS display on instrument cluster screen gives the following information:
   
Graphic
Graphic
•  Left zone indicates obstacle on left side.
•  Right zone indicates obstacle on right side.
•  If obstacle is in center then right and left both zone will get highlight.
3 bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle rear bumper, with all bars highlighted being very close and bar 3rd bar alone being distant.
9.2.1 Operation of RPAS
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Change the gear from neutral to reverse and disengage the Hand brake for RPAS information on instrument cluster screen.
The RPAS will be displayed in the instrument cluster screen during obstacle detection.
Graphic
3. Start moving the vehicle in reverse direction.
4. Display bars in the respective direction will glow according to obstacles in its path.
Graphic
5. The beep sound can be heard from the driver side speaker. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacle is less than 50 cm.
Graphic
9.2.2 Pay Attention
1. If bars in any one of the sides are displayed with ‘?’ marks and “Park Assist Fail” is displayed on instrumental cluster display, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
2. If all bars are displayed with ‘?’ marks and “Park Assist Fail” is displayed on instrumental cluster display, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
3. Obstacle in the blind zone cannot be sensed by the system. Applicable for all sensors.
Graphic
4. Please check the condition of the obstacle behind and in front of your vehicle before moving. In some cases, the display may be not as same as reality due to the installed sensor level, obstacle shape and reflection condition.
Graphic
5. Point B will be detected sooner or later, but A may not be detected at all. Applicable for all sensors.
Graphic
6. Not all obstacles are detected from 120 cm. For instance, a person is detected from 75 cm because of the weak reflection or absorption of the waves of the clothes.
Graphic
7. The distance indication may move up and down due to different sizes of the obstacle at different positions.
Graphic
8. Though the obstacle is in the sensing zone, obstacle may not be detected since the ultrasonic waves are not reflected back to the sensor.
Graphic
9. The obstacle of a conical shape may not be detected, since the ultrasonic waves get reflected away.
9.2.3 Limitations of PAS
•  System may not sense obstacles like wire mesh, handrail, small objects which are below the bumper level.
•  System may not sense obstacles with cotton or spongy surface, which will absorb ultrasonic waves emitted by PAS.
•  System performance is dependent on the reflection angle of the obstacle.
•  System may give false alert without obstacles while parking/reversing the vehicle on grasslands, gravels and bumpy roads considering it to be an obstacle.
•  System may alert you by sensing the ground when the bumper is not fitted in its intended position or when the vehicle is overloaded.
•  System may give false signal while the vehicle moves from plain ground to a slope terrain and vice versa.
•  System may give false signal by sensing the ground when the bumper is tilted more from the normal position or when the vehicle is heavily overloaded.
•  System may give false signal an alarm during heavy rain, snow and heavy wind conditions.
•  The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Some obstacles for example as follows:
–  Sharply-angled objects.
–  Tall or curved curb.
–  Low obstacles (with height of 40 cm above ground level).
–  Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of the vehicle.
•  Depending upon the shape of the obstacle and other environmental factors, the detection distance may shorten or detection may be impossible.
•  Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.
•  Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached, even if they have been detected once.
•  Because of other ultrasonic sources, sensor may give false alarm for e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners and neon lights.
•  Due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves, the vicinity of the vehicle is noisy. It may cause sensor to give false alarm.
10 HEATING VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM
HVAC system provided in the vehicle enables occupants to automatically/manually adjust air flow distribution pattern, air flow rate, air intake mode and air temperature inside passenger compartment. By appropriately adjusting the control knobs/switches provided on the HVAC control panel, located on centre console, occupant’s comfort can be ensured. HVAC system also helps in defrosting and defogging / de-misting the windshield and windows.
Air flow direction can be further controlled by adjusting louvres of air vents. An air filter is provided at the inlet of HVAC blower.
Engine coolant is utilized to heat the cabin air. For cooling the cabin air, an air-conditioning circuit based on the vapor compression refrigeration cycle is used. The air-conditioning system uses a refrigerant along with a suitable lubricating oil. Although being non-ozone depleting, the refrigerant is a greenhouse gas, hence once allowed to escape in the atmosphere, it adversely affects the environment by contributing to global warming/climate change.
Refrigerant used in system is a hazardous liquefied gas and is under high pressure. The refrigerant is colourless and has ethereal or faint sweetish odour. Exposure of refrigerant to skin or eyes may cause irritation and frostbite. They can also cause suffocation, dizziness and loss of concentration. When mixed with compressed air or certain other refrigerants, it may form flammable mixture. Never try to service HVAC system yourself which would involve refrigerant handling.
If you sleep while operating the air conditioner or heater with all the windows closed, You may suffocate to death due to lack of ventilation. When you operate the air conditioner or heater, ventilate frequently.
Multiple vents are provided for distributing the air, being force-circulated by HVAC blower, throughout the passenger compartment.
To ensure sufficient air flow and hence adequate HVAC system performance, air flow path should be kept free of obstructions. Keep system’s air intake, located near plenum applique, free of snow, leaves and other debris. Also keep the area in front of air vents free of any obstruction inside the cabin.
10.1 Air Vents
Graphic
A
Windshield Defogger Vents
B
Side Defogger Vents
C
Side Vents
D
Center Vents
E
Foot Vents
F
DATC Control Panel
G
Rear Vents
Front Centre Vent
Graphic
You can adjust the direction of the airflow by adjusting the horizontal/vertical louvers.
Front Side Vent
Graphic
You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving the airflow direction control lever on the air outlet.
The outlet vents can be opened or closed using the vent dial.
Rear AC Vents
Rear AC vents are located on the rear side of the center console. It can be closed when it is not required
Graphic
Air will flow through the rear AC vents only during face mode or face & foot Mode.
10.2 Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC)
If you press the AUTO switch and adjust the temperature using the temperature control knob, the temperature inside the vehicle is maintained based on the set temperature, while the airflow and air distributions are automatically controlled. The temperature for driver and co-driver side can be adjusted separately by each temperature control knob. You can also manually control the airflow, air temperature and air distribution. To turn off the A/C or heater, press the OFF switch.
A
Auto Switch
G
Dual Mode Switch
B
DATC Function Display
H
ECON Switch
C
AC Switch
I
Front Defogger Switch
D
Driver Temperature Control Knob
J
Recirculation Mode Switch
E
Blower Speed Control Switches
K
Mode Switch
F
OFF Switch
L
Co-Driver Temperature Control Knob
Graphic
Auto Operation Mode
Graphic
1. Press the AUTO switch.
2. AUTO indicator is displayed on the display.
3. Set the desired cabin temperature with the driver side temperature control knob.
4. The temperature of cabin is automatically maintained according to the set temperature.
5. If the driver and co-driver require different temperatures in their respective zones, Rotate the co-driver side temperature knob to activate dual zone and different temperatures can be adjusted by using temperature control knobs.
When using the blower speed control switch, mode switch (Recirculation mode switch), A/C switch or front defogger switch during the auto operation mode, AUTO indicator on the display goes out and the air conditioner system will be in semi auto mode.
Manual Operation Mode
Graphic
1. Press A/C switch.
2. Set the desired temperature by rotating the driver temperature control knob.
3. Adjust the blower speed by pressing the blower speed control switches.
4. Select the air flow by pressing the air distribution/mode switch.
5. Select the air source mode by pressing recirculation mode switch.
In manual mode, the AUTO indicator on display does not come on and you can manually adjust the climate conditions by controlling the switches/knobs such as temperature, blower speed, mode (air distribution), A/C, air source selection, ECON and DUAL mode switch.
To activate the auto operation mode, press AUTO switch.
Graphic
Below mentioned switches/knobs in DATC control panel is pressed/Rotated, respective icons and changes are displayed in the infotainment screen.
Blower speed control switches
Graphic
Graphic
User can adjust the airflow by pressing the blower speed control switches with ignition ON. If you adjust the airflow using blower speed control switches in AUTO mode, the AUTO indicator on DATC display goes off and the operation mode is changed to the manual mode. Blower speed can be increased by pressing the blower speed increase switch and blower speed can be decreased by pressing the blower speed decrease switch.
The air conditioner does not operate by directly pressing the blower speed control switches if the A/C switch is not pressed. However, the air flows due to the fan operation.
AUTO switch
Graphic
If you press the AUTO switch with AC ON, AUTO indicator appears on DATC Display and the set temperature is maintained while the airflow and air distribution are automatically controlled.
The indicator lamp lights up when AUTO mode is turned ON, and the lamp turns off when the AUTO mode is turned OFF.
OFF switch
Graphic
You can turn off the dual automatic temperature controller (DATC) by using this switch.
The display goes off by pressing OFF switch.
Co–Driver temperature control knob
Graphic
To adjust the co-driver side temperature as desired, rotate the co-driver temperature control knob while the A/C is ON. The temperature decreases, when the co-driver temperature control knob is rotated in anti-clockwise direction and temperature increases, when the co-driver temperature control knob is rotated in clockwise direction.
The co-driver set temperature is visible on the DATC display.
When co-driver temperature knob is rotated, Dual mode automatically Turns ON. When the DUAL mode switch is turned off, the co-driver temperature returns to the driver side set temperature.
Front Defogger switch
Graphic
When you press this switch, its indicator lamp turns ON, and the airflow direction is changed to the windshield and door glasses while outside air comes in with A/C operation.At this time A/C, front defogger and Fresh air indicators shows up in the DATC Display. If you press the switch again, front defogging stops with the indicator lamp turns off and the mode returns to the previous operation. When the front defogger is ON, its indicator lamp turns ON and the lamp turns off when the front defogger is turned OFF.
ECON Switch
Graphic
Press the ECON switch to run air conditioning in ECON mode, DATC displays ECON indicator. During ECON AC operation, the system automatically cuts OFF at a higher temperature than normal AC. The operation can be used during mild weather conditions for better fuel efficiency. Comfort level may be compromised during this operation.
Press the ECON switch again to turn OFF economy mode.
When ECON switch is turned ON, dual mode will get disabled if it was operating in dual mode.
Recirculation Mode switch
Graphic
If you press this switch with AC ON, the indication lamp lights turn up and the air recirculation indicator on DATC display is displayed. If you press this switch again, the indication lamp turns off and the air source selection is changed to Fresh air intake mode.
Do not use recirculation mode in the vehicle for extended periods of time with every window closed. Doing so can cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window due to lack of oxygen.
If exhaust gas comes in, there is a danger of carbon monoxide poisoning. Set to the fresh air intake mode after passing through a dusty or polluted area with air recirculation mode.
Automatic selection of the fresh or air circulation mode
When the front defogger switch is pressed, outside air automatically comes in. When the switch is pressed again, the previous mode is restored.
DUAL switch
Graphic
This function allows controlling the co-driver side temperature separately with A/C ON.
•  If you press the DUAL switch, the indicator lamp lights up and DUAL mode indicator on the DATC display comes on.
•  When the driver temperature control knob is rotated, the driver side temperature on the DATC display is adjusted as desired and when co-driver temperature control knob is rotated, co-driver side temperature on the DATC display is adjusted as desired.
•  While the DUAL mode switch is operating, its indicator lamp lights up and the lamp turns off when the DUAL mode switch is not working.
When the DUAL mode switch is turned off with its indicator, the co-driver side temperature returns to the driver side set temperature.
Mode switch
Graphic
Each time you press this switch with IGN ON, the air distribution mode is changed and displayed as shown in the figure below.
When you press this switch in AUTO mode (AUTO indicator ON), the system is changed to the manual control mode (AUTO indicator OFF).
Graphic
Face Mode
Graphic
Face & Foot Mode
Note: Face and Foot mode is intended to provide cold air from face side air vents and warm air from foot vents. This mode can be selected during cold sunny conditions. However by selecting the temperature control to either Full Cold or Full Hot, the temperature in face and foot vents will be same.
Graphic
Foot Mode
Note: When choosing this mode, some air flows out from windshield and side glass vents to prevent from fogging on the windshield.
Graphic
Foot and front defogger mode.
Driver temperature control knob
Graphic
To adjust the temperature as desired, rotate the driver side temperature control knob The temperature decreases, when the driver temperature control knob is rotated in anti-clockwise direction & temperature increases, when the driver temperature control knob is rotated in clockwise direction.
A/C switch
Graphic
Air conditioner is turned ON and OFF with this switch. While air conditioner switch is operating, its indicator lamp lights up, and the lamp turns off when the switch is not working.
10.2.1 Cabin Cooling Operation
Graphic
1. Adjust the blower speed by pressing the blower control switches.
2. Press AC ON switch.
3. Decrease the set temperature by rotating the temperature control knob in anti-clockwise direction.
4. Adjust the air distribution with using the mode switch.
5. Select the air intake mode by pressing air recirculation switch.
10.2.2 Cabin Heating Operation
Graphic
1. Adjust the blower speed by pressing the blower speed control switches.
2. Press AC ON switch if required.
3. Increase the set temperature by rotating the temperature control knob in clockwise direction.
4. Adjust the air distribution with using the mode switches.
5. Select the air intake mode by pressing air recirculation switch.
10.2.3 Defogging/Defrosting
•  Press the front defogger switch. (The indicator lamp ON).
•  Increase the blower speed using blower speed control switches.
•  Set the temperature as desired rotating the temperature control knob.
•  To quickly remove the fog on the glass, set the blower speed to max.
To prevent the windshield from fogging up, it is recommended to set the air intake mode switch to the fresh air intake mode.
Graphic
If you press the front defogger switch), the fresh air intake mode is applied with A/C ON.
When it rains and is very humid, you may have fog on the windshield and windows. The fog will block your view through all windows and can create a dangerous situation.
If this happens, set the air intake mode to the fresh air intake mode and change the airflow direction toward the windshield.
•  An extended air conditioner operation in the foot level, foot & front defogger or defogger modes may cause the outside of the windshield to fog due to the temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the vehicle. In this case, quickly remove the moisture using the windshield wipers and change the airflow to face mode to reduce fogging on the outside of the windshield.
•  Make sure to remove any foreign matters such as snow and leaves on the air inlets to avoid window fogging, especially in winter and summer.
10.2.4 DATC – Climate Control Through Infotainment Screen
Climate Control Setting also can be done through infotainment screen.
Graphic
•  Go to setting page in infotainment Screen then select climate control.
•  Under Climate control screen, tap on icons to enable/disable the features.
•  All HVAC setting can be changed by pressing respective symbols or buttons in climate screen.
Graphic
Graphic
10.2.5 Remote Cooling
Graphic
Remote cooling feature allows user to control Cabin climate settings from outside the vehicle.
•  During remote cooling operation, cabin temperature settings will be changed to default 18 °C in Auto mode for both driver and co-driver to achieve faster cooling.
•  Vehicle cabin will be cooled down before entering vehicle. Thus, making cabin more comfortable for the passengers when they enter the car that was parked in the hot sun.
Activate Remote Cooling feature
Graphic
Remote cooling starts by automatically once we press “start engine” button in the Adrenox connect mobile App.
In Automatic transmission vehicle
•  All Doors closed.
•  Gear is in PARK position.
•  Fuel level is greater than 10 litre.
•  Vehicle should be in Standstill.
Graphic
When vehicle is started remotely using Adrenox connect mobile app, By default Cabin climate settings will be changed to 18 °C in Auto mode.
In remote Engine start condition user will have access to control below Cabin climate setting under Climate settings.
1. Duration time : User can select the time duration for which remote cooling will be active using Adrenox connect mobile App, duration can be selected from minimum of 2 minute to maximum of 15 minute.
2. Cabin Temperature settings: User can change temperature settings during Remote cooling.
3. Front defrost: User can activate /de-activate front defrost during remote cooling by selecting front defrost option in mobile app.
4. Rear Defrost: User can activate /de-activate Rear defrost during remote cooling by selecting Rear defrost option in Adrenox connect mobile app.
Once vehicle is started remotely customer will get feedback in the Adrenox connect mobile App,
Graphic
Remote cooling can be de-activated by using mobile app. if vehicle is already in Remote start condition by pressing start engine button, remote cooling will be deactivated.
In mobile app customer will get notification if remote cooling is failed.
Remote cooling operation is suggested to be used while vehicle is parked in open sunny area for long duration. It is recommended not to operate Remote cooling when vehicle is parked in a closed environment.
10.3 Electronic Temperature Control (ETC) (If Equipped)
Graphic
Heater/Air conditioner operation
Graphic
Operate while the engine is running.
•  Adjust the airflow by rotating the blower speed control knob(4).
•  Set the desired temperature by pressing the temperature control switch (2).
•  Adjust the air distribution with using the mode switch (8, 9,12,13).
•  Select the air intake mode by pressing air recirculation switch (7).
•  Press the air conditioner switch (5) to use A/C.
While each switch is operating, its indicator lamp lights up, and the lamp turns off when the switch is not working.
Temperature indicator lamp (1)
This lamp indicates temperature change by the temperature control switch (2) operation.
As you press ˅ button on the temperature control switch (2), the red LED (B) turns off one by one, and the blue LED (A) lights on in the same way.
As you press ˄ button on the temperature control switch (2), the blue LED (A) turns off one by one, and the red LED (B) lights on in the same way.
Temperature control switch (2)
By pressing this switch, you can adjust the temperature as desired.
Each time you press the ˄ button on temperature control switch, the temperature increases and the temperature decreases as ˅ button is pressed.
The blue (cold)/red(hot) LED in the temperature indicator lamp (1) will come on or goes off depending on the temperature control switch (2) operation.
While the red LEDs of the temperature indicator lamp (B) are lighted on, they will turn off one by one each time you press ˅ button on the temperature control switch (2). Likewise, the blue LEDs will go off one by one as you press the ˄ button on the temperature control switch (2) while they came on the temperature indicator lamp (A).
Blower knob position indicator (3)
This indicator shows current position of the blower speed control knob (4).
Blower speed control knob (4)
You can adjust the airflow by rotating the blower speed control knob (4) with IGN ON.
The blower speed decreases if you rotate the knob (4) anti-clockwise (A) and it increases when you rotate the knob clockwise (B). This will stop at OFF position of the knob (4).
Graphic
Air conditioner switch (5)
Rotate the blower speed control knob (4) clockwise (B ) from the OFF position while the engine is ON.
1. Press the air conditioner switch (5).
2. Press the temperature control switch (2) to adjust for the cool air to come out.
3. Set the air distribution as desired by pressing the mode switch (8, 9, 12, 13).
While each switch is operating, its indicator lamp lights up, and the lamp turns off when the switch is not working.
Do not use recirculation mode for extended periods of time. Doing so can cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window due to lack of oxygen.
The air conditioner does not operate with rotating the blower speed control knob (4), if the A/C switch (5) is not pressed. However, the air flows 7 due to the blower operation.
Front defogger switch (6)
Use this switch for quick defogging with the engine ON.
When you press this switch (6), its indicator lamp (C) lights up, and the airflow direction is changed to the windshield and door glasses while outside air comes in with A/C operation.
To cancel the Front defogger function, press any switch among the mode switch (8, 9,12,13) and MAX A/C switch (10).
Graphic
When it rains and is very humid, you may have fog on the windshield and windows. The fog will block your view through all windows and can create a dangerous situation. If this happens, press the foot and front defogger mode switch (12 ) to change the airflow direction toward the windshield with Foot and front defogger mode.
Air recirculation mode switch (7)
When you press this switch (7), air recirculation mode is applied and indicator lamp (7C) lights on.
Use this mode when maximum heating/air conditioning is needed.
If you press this switch (7) again, the indication lamp (7C) turns off and the air source selection is changed to Fresh air intake mode.
Do not use recirculation mode for extended periods of time. Doing so can cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window due to lack of oxygen.
If exhaust gas comes in, there is a danger of carbon monoxide poisoning. Set to the fresh air intake mode after passing through a dusty or polluted area with air recirculation mode.
MAX A/C switch (10)
When you press MAX A/C (Maximum cooling) switch (10) while the heater or A/C is running,
•  The air conditioner operates.
•  The air recirculation mode is applied.
•  The air flows toward the face.
•  The temperature is automatically set to the lowest with all blue LEDs (4EA) of the temperature indicator lamp (A) lighted up.
Graphic
ECON mode switch (11)
When user presses on ECON mode switch (11), ECON mode is applied and indicator lamp (11C) lights ON and system operates in ECON mode.
During ECON AC operation, the system automatically cuts OFF at a higher temperature than normal AC.
The operation can be used during mild weather conditions for better fuel efficiency.
Comfort level may be compromised during this operation.
•  The air conditioner operates.
•  The air recirculation mode is applied.
•  The air flows toward the face.
Press the ECON switch again to turn OFF economy mode.
To cancel the fresh air intake mode, press the recirculation mode switch (7).
Airflow mode switch (6, 8, 9, 12, 13)
Graphic
You can adjust the airflow distribution with using these switches.
While each switch is operating, its indicator lamp lights up, and the lamp turns off when the switch is turned off.
Graphic
The air flows toward the windshield and door glasses. If you press the front defogger switch, the fresh air intake mode is automatically applied and the air conditioner operates.
Graphic
Face mode (when cooling).
Graphic
Face and foot mode
Graphic
Foot and front defogger mode
The fresh air intake mode is automatically applied.
Graphic
Foot mode (normally, when heating).
Note: While in foot mode, some air flows to the windshield and door glasses to prevent the windshield from fogging.
10.4 Defogging/Defrosting
•  Press the front defogger switch (1). (The indicator lamp (C) ON).
•  Rotate the blower speed control knob (2) clockwise from the OFF position.
•  Set the temperature as desired using the control switch (3).
•  To quickly remove the fog on the glass, set the blower speed control knob (2) at a high speed position.
To prevent the windshield from fogging up, it is recommended to set the air source selection switch (4) to the fresh air intake mode.
Graphic
If you press the front defogger switch (1), the fresh air intake mode is applied with A/C ON.
When it rains and is very humid, you may have fog on the windshield and windows. The fog will block your view through all windows and can create a dangerous situation. If this happens, set the air source selection switch to the fresh air intake mode and change the airflow direction toward the windshield.
•  An extended air conditioner operation in the foot-level, foot/defrost-level or defrost modes may cause the outside of the windshield to fog due to the temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the vehicle. In this case, quickly remove the moisture using the windshield wipers and change the airflow to face-level mode to reduce fogging on the outside of the windshield.
•  Make sure to remove any foreign matters such as snow and leaves on the air inlets to avoid window fogging, especially in winter and summer.
10.5 Replacing Air Conditioner Filter
Replace the Air Conditioner Filter When
Unpleasant odor is generated at the first operation after a long unused period. Cooling and blowing capacity have decreased.
•  Do not apply excessive force to the holders when removing the glove box. It may cause a deformation of holders and results in a loose installation.
•  Replace air conditioner filter while paying attention to the installing direction.
•  Replace the air conditioner filter at every 10 000 km of driving. However, if the vehicle is operated under severe conditions, such as on dusty or unpaved roads, and excessive air conditioner or heater use, the replacement interval can be shortened.
•  When the filter is contaminated, it will decrease the cooling or heating capacity of the system and creates unpleasant odors.
1. Detach the locknut (10 MM, 1EA) and screws (2EA) from lower part of the glove box.
2. Open the glove box by pressing the open switch.
3. Remove the glove box by loosening 4 screws and 3 of IP setscrews from upper part of the glove box.
Graphic
4. Disconnect the switch wirings (1) and lamp wirings (2) while pulling out the glove box.
Graphic
5. After detaching the damper cable by pulling it up, remove the glove box completely. (When attaching, make sure that the damper cable passes through the inside of the fixing bracket.)
Graphic
6. Pull out the A/C filter after removing the fixing cover by pulling it off using your hand.
Graphic
7. Install in reverse order of removal.
Graphic
When replacing the filter, the arrow printed on the side of the filter should face to the blower motor.
11 CNG AND REQUIREMENTS
11.1 CNG Fuel Tank
Graphic
CNG fuel tank with 60 litres (30 litres + 30 Litres) capacity is located behind the second row seat underneath the rear luggage compartment floor carpet.
Graphic
The shutoff valve of the tank can be accessed by opening the tailgate and removing luggage compartment floor mat.
Turn clockwise to close and counter clockwise to open the shutdown valve.
Close the shutoff valve in the CNG tank when there is any gas leak from the CNG system.
Incase of gas leakage, immediately turn OFF CNG cylinder shutoff valve and Contact Authorized Dealer.
Ensure there is no load over the cylinder to avoid damage to the CNG components.
11.2 CNG Refilling Valve
Graphic
CNG refilling valve is located near the Petrol filling port.
Remove the dust plug of refilling valve for filling the CNG. Reinstall the dust plug after refueling.
If the dust plug is not properly reinstalled there will be no gas flow and the engine will not start.
If the fuel filler lid is not closed properly the engine will not start and “fuel lid open” alert will be displayed in instrument cluster.
If the fuel lid is not closed vehicle will not crank the engine, to indicate the same an alert will be displayed in the cluster.
Display (TFT)
Display (Digital)
Graphic
Graphic
11.3 CNG Identification Plate
CNG identification plate is fitted in fuel lid with CNG identification and installation details.
Graphic
Graphic
11.4 Fuel Mode Switch
Graphic
The fuel mode switch is located on the driver panel switch bank.
Single press on the switch can seamlessly switch between Petrol and CNG when the vehicle is driven.
Below operations should be performed to start the vehicle through user intended fuel type.
Auto Mode : When ignition is switched ON, by default Auto mode will be triggered and vehicle will start using petrol and will switch to CNG after few seconds.
Petrol Mode : When ignition is switched ON, followed by single press of fuel mode switch, vehicle will start using petrol and will continue to run in petrol.
Forced CNG Mode : When ignition is switched ON, followed by long press of fuel mode switch for more than 5 seconds , vehicle will start using CNG and will continue to run in CNG.
•  The Forced CNG mode is allowed only for 20 consecutive.
•  Then vehicle will be started using petrol, if petrol is not available vehicle will start using CNG in limp home mode with limited power.
•  Vehicle will switch out of limp home mode if its again started with petrol.
Petrol Mode
When the vehicle is running with petrol as fuel, vehicle will indicate the same through cluster display.
DIGITAL TFT
Graphic
Graphic
CNG Mode
When the vehicle is running in CNG vehicle will indicate the same through cluster display.
DIGITAL TFT
Graphic
Graphic
11.5 CNG Safety Sticker
A CNG safety sticker displaying important safety information is affixed to the vehicle's A-pillar trim.
Graphic
11.6 Do’s and Don’ts
Do's
•  Incase of gas leakage immediately turn OFF CNG cylinder shutoff valve and Contact Authorized Dealer.
•  Ensure the tight fitment of dust plug on filler valve to avoid gas flow cut-off.
•  Do empty the CNG tank and remove when the vehicle is taken to body repairs.
•  If any service turn OFF the cylinder shutoff valve prior to repair work.
•  Test the CNG cylinders every 3 Years by Authorized Government Testing Agency.
•  Ensure the gas vent out to the atmosphere in case of any leakage.
•  Ensure to switch OFF the engine while filling Petrol/CNG.
•  Ensure the fuel filler lid is closed to start the engine.
•  Incase the vehicle does not change over to CNG Contact Authorized Mahindra Dealer
•  Ensure the availability of fire extinguisher in the vehicle at any time.
•  Use only tested/approved genuine CNG parts.
Don'ts
•  Do not fill cylinder above 200 bar pressure.
•  Do not open pressure regulator/ CNG components at your own.
•  Do not retro fit CNG components.
•  Do not keep any inflammable items near the CNG system.
•  Do not smoke while refilling CNG.
•  Do not use any accessories in gas kit.
•  Do not allow unauthorised/ untrained person to repair or tune the CNG system.
•  Do not use any other gas or refill with domestic LPG.
•  Avoid short circuit of electrical connections.
•  Never discharge CNG gas in public/ prohibited/ closed area.
•  Do not smoke inside the cabin.
12 STARTING AND DRIVING
12.1 Safety Tips - Before Starting Your Vehicle
Before starting the vehicle, inspect the interior and exterior of the vehicle for any damages, leaks, loose parts, foreign objects/debris. In case of any abnormality noticed, contact Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
Before starting your journey, check and ensure proper functioning of safety devices/components like brake system, steering system, all lamps and tyres. Also ensure no critical warning lamps are ON in the cluster.
In case of any safety device/component not functioning as intended or any critical warning lamps found ON in cluster, contact Authorized Mahindra Service Center and get it rectified before starting the journey.
Adjust the seat headrest, steering wheel and fasten the seat belt as described in this manual. Never perform any seat / steering adjustments when the vehicle is in motion. Start the vehicle only when seated and belted in the driver’s seat.
Engine idle speed is controlled by engine management system. When the engine starts, idle RPM runs higher than normal in order to warm the engine. The engine idle speed RPM reduces once the engine warms up.
Never start your vehicle in a closed garage or in an enclosed area. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always keep the garage door open or start the engine in an open area.
Mirror Adjustment: Ensure that the rear view mirror and both the ORVM’s are adjusted for an unobstructed view of the road behind.
Exterior Lamps: With the help of someone observe and confirm normal operation of all exterior lamps while you work on the controls from the driver seat. Also, check functioning of all lamps in the instrument panel.
Door Latches: Check for positive closing, latching, and locking of all doors, both from inside and outside.
Fluid Leaks: Check the area under the vehicle after an overnight parking for fuel, brake fluid, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. If leaks are observed contact Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
12.2 Starting the Engine
Make sure all vehicle occupants are properly seated in their seats and have buckled their safety belts.
For more information on seat, refer to the “Seat Belts” section in this manual.
Before cranking the engine, A few warning lamps briefly illuminate after turning on the ignition. For further details of warning lamps, refer the section on “Warning Lamps in the Instrument Cluster”.
Starting Procedure
1. Turn the ignition ON by pressing the Start Stop button or through ignition key.
2. Shift the gear shift lever to neutral position.
3. Apply parking brake.
4. Do not press the accelerator.
5. Press the clutch pedal and turn the key momentarily to the START position to crank the engine. Once the engine starts, release the key.
6. For PKE: Press the clutch pedal and press the start stop button to crank the engine. Once the engine starts, release the Start Stop button.
The engine can be started from any position (OFF / ACC / ON) of the start/stop switch.
•  Do not continue cranking the ignition key after the engine has started. This will lead to damage of the starter and other engine components.
•  In PKE, if engine start/stop button is pressed without pressing the brake pedal, engine will not start and the vehicle power modes will change as follows: OFF - ON - OFF - ON.
•  If the engine start/stop button is pressed from the OFF position directly, along with the brake in depressed position, there may be a small delay in the engine cranking. This is normal and not to be taken as a fault.
•  Never press the engine start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of direction control and braking function, leading to an accident.
•  Once the engine is started, it would not stop even if the key is not inside the vehicle. Before leaving the driver seat, always make sure engine start/stop button is in OFF position and always take the Smart Key with you. Vehicle safety and security would be affected if these precautions are not followed.
•  To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 second before attempting to restart the engine.
•  If the engine fails to start even after repeated attempts as per the procedure given above, contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
If the vehicle battery has discharged, use booster cables, a booster battery or a battery from another vehicle to start. Jump-starting a vehicle can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to the “Jump-starting procedure” section in this manual.
If the engine still fails to start, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.
Ensure the following when the engine is running:
•  All warning lamps are OFF.
•  Low oil pressure lamp is OFF.
12.2.1 Engine Idling
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up.
Observe that all warning lamps are OFF when the engine is running.
After idling for a few second, follow the below steps to drive away:
1. Release the parking brake
2. Press the clutch
3. Shift the gear lever to 1st gear
4. Release the brake pedal.
5. Drive by releasing the clutch pedal and pressing the accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Engine Idling - In Cold Weather
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold and prolonged idling at low ambient temperatures. Long periods of idling may be harmful to your engine. Combustion chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely. Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
You must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulphur fuel. For smooth functioning and reliable operation of the engine during cold weather conditions, use winter fuel for refuelling which is available at filling stations during winter months. Check with your fuel retailer for details.
The recommended engine coolant mixture will work fine till ambient temperatures do not drop below -32 °C approx. For ensuring above performance, it is a must that you use only recommended engine coolant.
12.2.2 Stopping the Engine
Before turning the engine OFF, always allow the engine to return to normal idle speed and run for few second. This assures proper cooling and lubrication of the turbocharger. This is particularly necessary after any hard driving.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, before turning OFF the engine and leaving the vehicle, always follow the below mentioned safety tips.
Stopping Procedure
1. Keep your right foot on the brake pedal.
2. Turn front wheels towards the road curb.
3. Engage the parking brake.
4. Switch OFF the ignition, turn the key to the steering lock position and remove the key.
5. Press the start stop button once to switch off the vehicle (for PKE only).
6. Shift the gear shift lever to 1st gear position or reverse gear position if parking on an incline.
7. Slowly release the brake pedal.
8. Lock your vehicle when leaving.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, before turning OFF the engine and leaving the vehicle, always:
•  When stopping for example, at a traffic light, be sure to depress the brake pedal firmly. For your safety, apply the parking brake, too when stopping on a hill.
•  While pressing the accelerator to raise the engine rpm in vehicle stationary condition, make sure that the gear is in “N” position. If the accelerator is operated in any other positions, the vehicle may move and cause an unexpected accident.
•  Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
•  When leaving the vehicle, stop the engine and park the vehicle with a gear engaged. If you need to leave the vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brakes firmly, and shift the gearshift lever to the “N” position. Otherwise, the vehicle may move unexpectedly and may cause an accident.
On a slope, never hold the vehicle at a stop using only the accelerator pedal or the creeping function. If you perform this operation for a certain period of time, a warning buzzer will sound, and in some cases the engine will stall. This can also cause excessive damage to the clutch.
12.3 Exhaust Gases
Protection against exhaust gas entry into the vehicles interior is considered in the design of the exhaust system.
•  Vehicle exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Oxides, Hydrocarbons and Particulate Matter. These are potential environmental and health hazards.
•  Avoid inhaling the exhaust gases. Carbon Monoxide is a colourless and odourless gas and can cause unconsciousness or even death.
•  If the exhaust system is damaged for any reason or you notice a change in the exhaust noise, have the vehicle checked by an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
•  Do not start the vehicle in a closed garage or in an enclosed area where ventilation is poor for the exhaust gases.
•  Since the engine compartment and exhaust system components are hot and can ignite a fire, do not park or leave the vehicle with the engine idling over dry grass, leaves, paper, rags or any combustible material.
Never keep the engine running when the vehicle is parked in an area which is not properly ventilated. This could lead to serious respiratory problems and/or death.
12.4 Driving Your Vehicle
12.4.1 Pedals
Graphic
A: Accelerator Pedal
B: Brake Pedal
C: Clutch Pedal
12.4.2 General Driving Precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimise the risk of accidents leading to serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
•  Before you drive your vehicle, please read this manual carefully.
•  Before you start driving, check proper operation of the brakes and steering system.
•  If, while driving, you hear any strange noise or feel unusual vibration, or if you have any concerns whatsoever, or if any warning lamps illuminate or buzzers sound, park/stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Identify the cause and take any necessary remedial action. Contact your Authorized Mahindra Service Center if necessary.
•  Never overload or improperly load your vehicle.
•  Always be attentive while driving and follow safe driving practices.
•  Always maintain the recommended inflation pressure in tyres.
•  Always drive at a safe speed appropriate for given driving conditions. You must follow the speed limits.
•  While backing up, keep a constant lookout for people, particularly children, or other obstructions or hazardous material that might be present behind the vehicle.
•  Avoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the vehicles centre of gravity and make your vehicle more unstable.
•  Loaded vehicles, with a higher centre of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
•  Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher centre of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have much better control.
•  When driving off-road or on rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.
•  Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially on rough terrains. Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion. Make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes.
•  If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (e.g. from concrete to gravel/sand/mud/snow) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds, especially the way it responds to steering, braking and accelerating inputs.
•  Be extremely careful when driving on pavements made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
•  If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake or steering application. Ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
•  It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
•  In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surfaces to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
12.4.3 Off-Road Driving Precautions
•  When driving off-road or on rugged terrains, never over speed or make sharp turns. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury.
•  Maintain steering wheel control at all times. Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion.
•  Do not drive horizontally or diagonally across steep slopes, your vehicle can tip over sideways. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred.
•  Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. You should either know the terrain or map-out your route before driving in the area.
•  Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud or water.
12.4.4 If your Vehicle is Submerged
If Your stationary Vehicle is Submerged up to over the bumper
Graphic
•  Contact your Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
•  Have the vehicle towed to nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center to check any entry of water into the engine.
•  All fluids including engine and transmission fluids required to be changed incase of water ingress and contamination.
Never attempt to start the engine, without the advice from Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
•  Never drive through water when it flows above the bottom portion of the bumper or above the tyre centre line.
•  The engine could get damaged internally, if attempts are made to cross through deep water.
•  Wet brake discs have a lower coefficient or friction resulting in reduced braking efficiency. Dab the brake pedal while driving to remove the film of water.
12.4.5 Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow water, there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water.
Never drive through still water that is higher than the bottom of the axle hubs. Not following this instruction will allow water to enter vehicle components causing internal damage to the components, affecting driveability, safety, emissions and reliability.
When driving through water, drive very slowly and at constant speed, less than 8 km/h. Drive with accelerator pedal in OFF and control speed, using only the brakes. At higher speed waves can be generated by the front of the vehicle. These water waves may enter air intake, causing severe engine damage or cause a vehicle to get stalled.
You must slow down while driving through shallow water. Speeding may cause water to splash onto the windshield, impairing your vision. In extreme conditions, you may get a water wedge formation between the road and tyre causing loss of control in the vehicle.
•  The ground under the water might not be firm which could result the water being deeper than expected when driving the vehicle through it.
•  Do not stop or shut OFF the engine while immersed in water. It helps in preventing water getting inside the exhaust pipes.
•  When backing down a ramp, do not allow the exhaust tail pipe to immerse in water.
•  Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure. It may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the oil’s lubricating qualities. If these are submerged in water, the lubricants should be replaced as required.
•  Water entering the transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damaging the transmission.
•  Sand, mud/sludge that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may affect braking efficiency. This may also damage brake system components. Wet brakes cannot stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by driving the vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
•  When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through water.
12.4.6 Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced.
The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Determine the exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to compensate for drifting.
12.4.7 After Driving Off-Road or through Water
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.
•  After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. Completely inspect the underbody of the vehicle for any damages.
•  Check for accumulations of plants or bushes or polyethylene / plastic. These could be a fire hazard. They might also hide damage to fuel lines, brake tubes/hoses, etc.
•  Inspect all the tubes/hoses and check for any fluid leakages.
•  Get heat exchangers (radiator and condenser) cleaned.
•  Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, suspension and brakes. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values specified in the ‘Repair Manual’.
•  We also recommend that the vehicle be checked at the Authorized Mahindra Service Center for any water entry into the transmission/axle or the engine.
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have full braking power when needed leading to accidents. If you have been operating the vehicle in off-road conditions, get the brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
•  If any unusual vibration is experienced, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance. Get it inspected/corrected as soon as possible.
•  After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission/transfer case/axle oils) to ensure the fluids have not been contaminated.
12.5 Fuel
Graphic
Petrol Use E20 (20 percent mixture of Ethanol in Motor Gasoline) confirming to IS 17021 specification or E10 (10 percent mixture of Ethanol in Motor Gasoline) confirming to IS 2796 specification having RON 95. Information regarding the fuel quality shall be available with the concerned fuel retail outlet.
Do not “top up” after the nozzle automatically shuts off when refuelling.
Always ensure the fuel cap is secured properly after fueling to avoid spillage or splash and causing fire incidents.
Do not fill Ethanol directly into the fuel tank. This will harm the fuel system, lines, engine and exhaust components.
Once you realize if inappropriate fuel filled in your vehicle, do not start the vehicle. Contact the nearby Authorized Mahindra Service Center for appropriate help and action in this regard.
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors and any skin or clothing contact. Direct skin contact with fuel or the inhalation of fuel vapor may affect your health.
CNG and Petrol fuel are highly inflammable.
Avoid sparks, naked flame, any potential spark producing devices while fueling.
Its highly recommended to turn off the engine while filling fuel at retail outlets.
Do not park your vehicle nearby or on any extreme hot surfaces / nearby bonfire locations.
12.5.1 Tips for Better Fuel Economy
Give due consideration to the points listed below for better performance of vehicle and enhancement of fuel economy:
•  Smooth, moderate operation will yield savings in fuel.
•  Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy.
•  Ensure that the parking brake is fully released.
•  Idling for long periods of time will waste fuel.
•  Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
•  Sudden or hard accelerations reduce fuel economy.
•  Warming up a vehicle in neutral on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy.
•  While idling, put the gear shift lever in the neutral position.
•  Resting your foot on the clutch pedal while driving will reduce fuel economy.
•  Combine errands and minimise stop-and-go driving.
•  Keep tyres properly inflated. It is recommended to check your tyre pressure in the morning when the tyre is cold.
•  Use recommended Lubricants. Refer to the Maintenance Section for specifications and capacities.
•  Operating with lower quantity or specification may reduce fuel efficiency.
•  Replace the fuel filter, air filter and AC filter at the recommended intervals.
•  Shift gears at the recommended speeds and RPM bands only. Refer to the Gear Shifting Speed table for further details.
•  Control the maximum speed between 80 and 100 km/h in 6th gear to achieve the best fuel efficiency.
•  Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and perform the owner maintenance checks recommended.
•  Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer will reduce fuel economy.
•  Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy.
•  Adding certain accessories to your vehicle may reduce fuel economy.
•  Driving on flat terrains offer improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrains.
•  Close windows during high speed driving for better fuel economy.
•  It is recommended to refuel in the morning (cold ambient temperature condition).
•  Resting your foot on the clutch pedal while driving will reduce fuel economy.
12.5.2 How to Calculate Fuel Efficiency (Mileage)
1. Ensure recommended tyre pressure is maintained.
2. Refuel your vehicle till the fuel gun at the fuel station with auto-cut-off.
3. Reset trip meter to zero.
4. Drive at a moderate speed for a minimum distance of 150 km.
5. Refuel at the same fuel station till the auto-cut-off.
6. Assuming ‘a’ litre of fuel was filled and ‘b’ was the trip meter reading. Fuel Efficiency = b/a km/l.
12.6 Ignition Switch (If Equipped)
Graphic
An illuminator ring is provided on the face of the ignition switch to help in locating the ignition switch at night. The ring will illuminate the moment the driver door is opened and will remain glowing till the driver door is closed.
The different positions of the ignition switch are:
LOCK - This is the ignition and steering lock position. The vehicle circuits and engine is completely switched OFF. The steering wheel is also locked and the key can be removed from the ignition only in this position.
ACC - The steering is unlocked and can be rotated. In this position, all electrical circuits are enabled. Use this mode when you want to listen to music, etc., with the engine temporarily switched OFF.
ON - All electrical circuits are enabled. Some of the warning or information lamps illuminate in this position. While some of the lamps will go out after a few second, some will continue to remain ON till the engine is started. When the vehicle is being driven, ignition switch remains in the ON position.
Do not leave the ignition in ON when the engine is OFF. This could lead to battery drain and ignition switch damage.
START - This position is to start the engine by cranking the starter motor. This is a momentary position. When the key is turned to start position, the starter cranks the engine. Once the engine is running, release the key, and the key reverts back to ON position and the starter motor disengages from the engine.
Do not continue cranking after the engine has started. This will lead to damage of the starter and other engine components.
If turning the key is difficult, jiggle the steering wheel from side to side and try again.
The key can be removed only in the LOCK position. When the key is removed, the steering column lock is activated and the steering wheel cannot be turned.
Never return the key to the LOCK position or try to remove the key, when the vehicle is in motion. Removing the key allows the steering wheel to lock. You will lose the control of the vehicle and may cause serious accident. Remove the key only when the vehicle is parked.
Key left warning buzzer: When opening the driver’s door after the ignition key is not removed from lock set, the buzzer will sound to alert you that the key is not removed. The buzzer will automatically turn off when closing the door or key is removed. After this, the buzzer will not sound even though the door is opened again.
12.7 Horn
Press the pad on the steering wheel to blow/sound the horn. The horn functions even when the ignition has been switched OFF.
Graphic
Horn will get activated when horn switch/pad is pressed.
It will get deactivated when horn switch/pad is released or after 10 second of continuously pressing.
If Horn Switch Input is ON for more than 10 second, Horn will get deactivate after 10 second.
12.8 Manual Transmission
The first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat rough. This is a normal phenomenon, and precision shifts will develop within the initial few hundred kilometers of running.
12.8.1 Gear Lever
Graphic
Your vehicle is fitted with manual transmission having six forward and one reverse gear. This shift pattern is imprinted on the gear lever knob.
The transmission is fully synchronized in all forward gears, so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished.
The clutch pedal should be depressed fully while shifting, and then released slowly.
12.8.2 Gear Indicator
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
The current gear lever position is indicated in the centre of the speedometer dial.
12.8.3 Neutral Position
This position stops the transmission of power from the engine to drive axle. With the gear lever in neutral and brakes released, the vehicle can move freely by pushing or towing. The engine can be started in this mode. It is always recommended to keep the brake pedal depressed in this position. It is advisable to shift into neutral when the vehicle is standstill for longer durations with the engine idling.
Coasting the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral and engine ON/OFF is not recommended. In an event of panic braking, you will not have the power of engine braking to slow down the vehicle. This may lead to personal injury or accident.
Do not leave the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral position. Always engage manual parking brake before leaving the vehicle, to prevent any vehicle movement leading to possible injury to a bystander or damage to vehicle.
12.8.4 Gears 1-6
Use the gears 1 to 6 as per vehicle load, road/traffic conditions or as per requirement. The current gear selection is indicated in the cluster.
Always depress the clutch fully before moving the gear lever from the current position to any desired position. Perform up-shifts or down-shifts one gear at a time, do not jump gears.
12.8.5 Recommended Gear Shifting Speeds
While driving, shift the gears as per recommended speeds for getting optimal Fuel Efficiency.
Upshifting
Shift Range
Vehicle Road Speed (km/h)
Tolerance (km/h)
1-2
17
+/- 2
2-3
25
3-4
38
4-5
53
5-6
65
Downshifting
Shift Range
Vehicle Road Speed (km/h)
Tolerance (km/h)
2-1
14
+/- 2
3-2
22
4-3
35
5-4
48
6-5
60
Shift gears at suitable road speeds to safeguard the transmission components. Avoid driving in high RPM’s (>3000 r/min).
When parking on an incline, gear alone may not be sufficient to prevent the vehicle from moving. Always set the manual parking brake in addition to shifting the gear lever into gear. It is also recommended to turn the front wheels towards the road curb.
12.8.6 Reverse
Graphic
This gear is to enable the vehicle to move in the reverse direction. Move the gear lever into this position only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the gear lever is in neutral position.
The reverse lock ring located immediately below the gear shift knob must be pulled upward while moving the shift lever to the reverse (R) position.
To avoid transmission damage, shift into or out of reverse gear only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. It is recommended you wait approximately for three second in neutral gear before shifting into or out of reverse gear.
For brief stops, e.g. at traffic lights, keep the gear shift in neutral and hold the vehicle with the brake pedal. For prolonged stops, it is recommended to switch OFF the engine and apply the parking brake. When stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient, do not hold it with the clutch/accelerator; use the brake to avoid unnecessary clutch wear/heat buildup.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear lever, which could result in an accident or serious injury.
On slippery/wet road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in a wheel slip and reduced vehicle control.
12.9 Micro Hybrid Technology (Engine Stop/Start System)
Engine Stop/Start system automatically “stops” and “starts” the engine when idle at signals or long traffic jams. This in turn gives a better fuel efficiency.
12.9.1 Engine Stop/Start System Overview
Graphic
Graphic
Engine Stop/Start system is activated / de-activated by the Engine Stop/Start button in the driver side switch bank. The LED on the button indicates the status of the ESS system.
The ESS will be enabled by default while the ignition ON. If ESS turns off by switch, it will automatically reactivate after the ignition is reset.
How does the Engine Stop/Start System Work?
Let’s take a simple example of driving in traffic conditions within your city. Assume that your vehicle has stopped at a traffic junction due to a red signal. The following steps illustrate how the system functions:
•  The vehicle has come to a halt at a traffic signal, is in the neutral gear and the clutch pedal is released.
•  The Engine Stop/Start lamp in the cluster will blink indicating that the engine is going to stop shortly. The engine will shut down automatically after a specific time period.
•  The Engine Stop/Start lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster indicating the engine was stopped by the “Engine Stop/Start” system.
•  Once the signal turns green, press the clutch pedal and the engine starts immediately.
•  The indicator in the cluster goes OFF indicating that the engine has started again and you are ready to drive on.
For auto stop to happen, the following all conditions are to be met:
•  Engine Stop/Start system is in active condition by default and should not be turned off using the selection switch.
•  Bonnet is fully closed.
•  In the current ignition cycle, the vehicle has crossed 7 km/h at least once.
•  Current status of the engine is idling.
•  Vehicle speed is zero.
•  Accelerator pedal and clutch pedal are fully released.
•  Vehicle battery should be in healthy condition.
•  Engine is warm (Engine coolant temperature is between 25 °C and 100 °C). This is an extra precaution to ensure safe working of the engine.
•  Gear in neutral.
•  OBD and CHECK ENGINE telltale in OFF condition.
For auto start to happen, the following conditions are to be met
•  Gear lever is in the neutral position, clutch pedal is fully pressed.
Engine auto stop conditions should be remains same to start the engine again by ESS system.
ESS will be operational when the engine coolant temperature reaches a minimum operating range.
12.9.2 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
1. What is the advantage of the system?
The Engine Stop/Start System aids in attaining better fuel efficiency on your vehicle and thus reducing your running costs. However, the mileage improvement will depend upon various parameters such as prevailing traffic, driving patterns, etc.
2. What are the other advantages of the system?
•  Since the engine is switched off during traffic signals / jams, considerable amount of CO2 release in the atmosphere is avoided. This reduces global warming and thus provides us with a cleaner atmosphere to live.
•  Ability to start the engine by pressing the clutch pedal.
•  Reduces noise pollution at traffic signals.
3. Is it possible to start the engine through the clutch pedal for the first time?
No, the engine can be cranked only with the ignition key for the first time. If the engine is stopped automatically by the system, only then it is possible to start the engine through clutch pedal.
4. How to activate/deactivate the system?
The system is activated by default during every ignition cycle. The LED indication on the Engine Stop/Start switch indicates the status of the system. The system can be turned OFF or back ON using the Engine Stop/Start switch.
5. Whether the system will get activated as soon as the engine is started the first time with the ignition key?
No, the Engine Stop/Start system can be activated only by the Engine Stop/Start switch, provided all listed conditions (in the previous section) are met. This is to ensure better performance of the engine in terms of fuel economy and durability.
6. What is to be done, if I don’t want the system to stop my engine at traffic signals/jams?
The system can be turned OFF by the Engine Stop/Start button in the central bezel switch bank.
7. Whether the A/C will function, if the engine is switched off?
No, the A/C will not work. However, the blower will be in operation when the ignition is ON.
8. What will happen if I keep the clutch continuously pressed at traffic signals/jams?
The system will not stop the engine if the clutch is continuously pressed since it indicates the driver’s intention of moving the vehicle immediately.
9. When the battery charge is low, whether the engine will be switched off?
If the battery charge drops below a certain threshold level, the system will not stop the engine so as to preserve the battery from further draining.
10. Whether I will be able to operate the engine with the normal ignition key?
Yes, normal operation with the ignition key is always possible.
11. Whether the vehicle will start (or) stop in gear?
The vehicle will not start or stop automatically in gear to ensure safety. It will do so only in the neutral position of the gear lever.
12. Whether the system will stop my engine in moving traffic?
No, the engine will be stopped only when the vehicle speed is zero.
13. Whether the audio system will be switched OFF, when the engine shuts down?
No, the audio system will not be switched OFF and you can continue to enjoy the music.
14. Whether the engine will re-crank whenever the clutch pedal is pressed?
No, when the engine is running, the starter motor will not attempt to re-crank.
15. If any component involved in the system fails, what will happen?
The system has a built-in diagnostic module which understands the failure and immediately goes to bypass mode. In the bypass mode, the engine can be turned ON and OFF by ignition key as usual.
12.10 Do’s and Don’ts
Do's
•  Incase of gas leakage immediately turn OFF CNG cylinder shutoff valve and Contact Authorized Dealer.
•  Ensure the tight fitment of dust plug on filler valve to avoid gas flow cut-off.
•  Do empty the CNG tank and remove when the vehicle is taken to body repairs.
•  If any service turn OFF the cylinder shutoff valve prior to repair work.
•  Test the CNG cylinders every 3 Years by Authorized Government Testing Agency.
•  Ensure the gas vent out to the atmosphere in case of any leakage.
•  Ensure to switch OFF the engine while filling Petrol/CNG.
•  Ensure the fuel filler lid is closed to start the engine.
•  Incase the vehicle does not change over to CNG Contact Authorized Mahindra Dealer
•  Ensure the availability of fire extinguisher in the vehicle at any time.
•  Use only tested/approved genuine CNG parts.
Don'ts
•  Do not fill cylinder above 200 bar pressure.
•  Do not open pressure regulator/ CNG components at your own.
•  Do not retro fit CNG components.
•  Do not keep any inflammable items near the CNG system.
•  Do not smoke while refilling CNG.
•  Do not use any accessories in gas kit.
•  Do not allow unauthorised/ untrained person to repair or tune the CNG system.
•  Do not use any other gas or refill with domestic LPG.
•  Avoid short circuit of electrical connections.
•  Never discharge CNG gas in public/ prohibited/ closed area.
•  Do not smoke inside the cabin.
12.11 Fuel-BS VI
Graphic
For Gasoline (Petrol) vehicles: Use E20 (20 percent mixture of Ethanol in Motor Gasoline) confirming to IS 17021 specification or E10 (10 percent mixture of Ethanol in Motor Gasoline) confirming to IS 2796 specification having RON 95. Information regarding the fuel quality shall be available with the concerned fuel retail outlet.
Graphic
In case you require freeze protection of fuel for cold start at sub-zero temperature, we recommend to add Mahindra Genuine additive “mFLO” for temperature up to -15 °C. For temperature lower than -15 °C recommend to fill winter grade automotive fuel available at the fuel retail outlet of that location.
Avoid filling any other grade of fuel with high sulphur content or kerosene. Do not add any additives which are not recommended by us. These actions will void the emission warranty of your vehicle and can cause permanent damage to the engine and emission control systems.
Do not “top up” after the nozzle automatically shuts off when refuelling.
Always ensure the fuel cap is secured properly after fueling to avoid spillage or splash and causing fire incidents.
Do not fill Ethanol directly into the fuel tank. This will harm the fuel system, lines, engine and exhaust components.
Once you realize if inappropriate fuel filled in your vehicle, do not start the vehicle. Contact the nearby Authorized Mahindra Service Center for appropriate help and action in this regard.
Do not fill Ethanol directly into the fuel tank. This will harm the fuel system, lines, engine and exhaust components.
Once you realize if inappropriate fuel filled in your vehicle, do not start the vehicle. Contact the nearby Authorized Mahindra Service Center for appropriate help and action in this regard.
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors and any skin or clothing contact. Direct skin contact with fuel or the inhalation of fuel vapor may affect your health.
CNG and Petrol fuel are highly inflammable.
Avoid sparks, naked flame, any potential spark producing devices while fueling.
Its highly recommended to turn off the engine while filling fuel at retail outlets.
Do not park your vehicle nearby or on any extreme hot surfaces / nearby bonfire locations.
12.11.1 Minimum Fuel Requirement
It is recommended maintaining a minimum of 10 litre of fuel in the fuel tank. Driving the vehicle till the fuel tank is empty is not recommended. Always have sufficient fuel in the tank. Check the fuel level prior to starting your journey.
Never carry fuel in separate containers in the vehicle, it is dangerous and may lead to inadvertent fuel leak or spillage.
12.12 Brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes in the front/rear wheels. Disc brakes offer good braking capability and reduced stopping distance. Wet brake discs result in reduced braking efficiency. After a car wash or driving the vehicle through water, pump the brake pedal mildly while driving to remove the film of water from the brake pads. Brake pads feature wear indicator. When the front brake pad is worn out, there will be an indication in the cluster, the brake warning lamp will be ON. Replace the brake pads as soon as possible.
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous. Stopping distance increases considerably when braking. Dry the brakes by driving at very slow speed and applying the brakes lightly until the brake performance becomes normal.
Even if the power assist (vacuum assistance) is completely lost, the brakes will still work. The brake pedal would be much harder than normal and the vehicle stopping / braking distance will be longer than usual.
Brake squeal occurs as a high frequency whistling noise usually at the end of the stop while pressing the brake pedal, squeal can occur from front or rear or from both ends. This is a normal condition caused by environmental factors such as cold, wet, snow, etc and vehicle usage pattern.
12.12.1 Parking on a Hill/Incline
If you have to park facing uphill, select first gear and turn the front wheels away from the kerb. If you have to park facing downhill, select reverse gear and turn the front wheels towards the kerb. Always ensure that the vehicle is in gear and parking brakes is engaged before leaving the vehicle.
12.12.2 Parking Brake - Manual
Graphic
To apply the parking brake, hold and pull the park brake lever up as firmly as possible. When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON, the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates.
To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press the release button on the bottom of the lever and lower the parking brake lever completely.
The brake warning lamp indicates only the parking brake status. It does not indicate the degree of brake application. Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the gear shift lever is in gear. When parking on a hill; first apply the parking brake; after that shift the TGS lever to 1st gear. This will avoid the load on the transmission, locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of gear.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving off. Failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear brakes. It will also result in reduced fuel efficiency; lowered brake pad life and rear brake squeal.
•  The parking brake should be adjusted as per recommended maintenance schedule.
•  Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle, and be certain to leave the transmission in gear. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage, hit a bystander resulting in personal injury.
•  Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake or the gear shift lever. Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child could move the vehicle leading to accidents.
•  The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
•  Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.
12.12.3 Hazard on Panic Braking
Hazard lamps are turned ON during panic braking for 5 second when the following conditions are met:
•  Ignition is ON
•  Vehicle speed is greater than 60 km/h
•  Panic/sudden brake is applied and high deceleration rate is sensed
12.13  Hazard Activation Upon Crash
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically in case of an unfortunate event of an accident where airbags are deployed. In such a scenario, the hazard lamps will be on for 30 minute or it can be turned off by operating Hazard switch (Off to On) or Ignition reset (Ignition Off and On)
Once activated hazard remains on for 30 minute by default
Deactivation
•  30 minute since activation is elapsed
•  Hazard switch On to Off transition is made
•  IGN turned Off and again turned On
12.14 Vehicle Breakdown Warning
In case of a brake down, hazards would be turned on automatically to indicate oncoming traffic. This feature will come into action upon opening the bonnet when vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h.
12.15 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Anti-lock Brake System (also called as ABS) is designed to help prevent lock-up of the wheels and stable stopping of vehicle during a sudden, panic emergency braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. The ABS system takes input from wheel speed sensors and brake pedal switch to control the brake fluid pressures at the wheels to avoid wheel lock-up. It allows vehicle to be steered during braking.
The minimum speed for ABS to function is 12 km/h. ABS is activated only during wheel lock conditions where ABS takes over and prevents wheel lock.
During the ABS operation, a slight pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal to indicate ABS is active. You may also hear motor noise from the engine compartment. It is recommended to hold the brake pedal firmly while the ABS is active rather than pumping the brake pedal.
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, a joint in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day, tends to activate the anti-lock brake system.
Graphic
The ABS warning lamp lights up when you switch ON the ignition and should go out after a few second. If the ABS warning lamp does not go out or if it comes ON while driving, it means there is a fault in the ABS system. In both cases, the normal braking system remains efficient, exactly as on a vehicle without ABS. The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
The ABS is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. The stopping distance may be longer in the following cases:
•  Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.
•  Driving with tyre chains installed.
•  Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road.
•  Driving on roads where the road surface is potholes or large differences in surface height.
Do not overestimate the Anti-lock Brake System: Although the Anti-lock Brake System assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. There are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with ABS active.
If tyre grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the Anti-lock Brake System will not be able to completely avoid wheel lock-up.
12.16 Electric Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD is a subsystem of the ABS system, It prevents least loaded wheel from locking on application of brakes, thus allows the wheel to maintain tractive contact with the road surface. The system monitors the wheel speed and when it identifies any slip, the pressure in the wheel cylinders is dumped thus preventing the wheels from locking.
A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the parking brake as well as ABS warning lamps. The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by an Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
12.17 Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP corrects for over-steering and under-steering behavior of the vehicle by applying the brake on the appropriate wheel automatically.ESP uses inbuilt sensors to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle, compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of over-steer or under-steer.
Graphic
Over-steer :When the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Under-steer :When the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The ESP cannot overrule the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction due to the prevailing road conditions. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skilful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle can not compensate for reckless or dangerous driving that could endanger the user’s safety or the safety of others on road or passerby.
12.17.1 ESP ON
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in active mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Graphic
When the ESP is in operation, ESP indicator lamp blinks in the instrument cluster.
When the ESP is operating, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.
When moving out of the mud or slippery road, accelerator response may be different because ESP system controls the engine r/min to come out of this slippery road condition. This is normal.
12.17.2 ESP OFF
In some driving conditions, to maximise traction, it may be beneficial to de-activate ESP.
Such conditions are:
•  To start in deep snow or on a loose surface
•  Driving in deep sand
•  Driving through deep mud etc.
Graphic
To de-activate ESP, press ESP OFF button on the driver side switch bank. Once ESP OFF mode is selected, a warning indicator illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Press ESP OFF button again to activate ESP function.
Mahindra recommends that ESP be operational in all normal driving conditions.
When ESP is in OFF mode, other functions like HHC (Hill Hold Control), HBA (Hydraulic Brake Assist), HDC (Hill Descent Control), DTC (Drag Torque Control), ROM (Roll Over Mitigation) will be in working mode.
However, for safety reasons, if the ESP system detects that the vehicle is going into a unstable condition, ESP will be automatically activated on depressing the brake pedal.
ESP, by default, will be in ON condition for every ignition cycle.
Graphic
If the ESP indicator blinks while driving, it indicates that ESP is working. If this indicator illuminates continuously, it indicates a malfunction in the ESP system. Drive carefully to the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center and get the ESP system checked.
12.17.3 Hill Descent Control (HDC)
Graphic
This system assists the driver to descend a steep slope by means of brake intervention limiting the vehicle speed without driver’s input on brakes. This does not replace cruise control.
During HDC, if the wheel slip becomes excessive, ABS will be activated automatically.HDC is a user-intended function. To activate, press HDC button on the driver control switch bank. The LED on the button illuminates indicating the status. Press the button again to deactivate HDC.The HDC feature can control the vehicle speed from 8 km/h to 35 km/h, Above 35 km/h the HDC feature will go to ready mode. The HDC feature will be deactivated automatically if vehicle speed is more than 60 km/h. (For Activating the HDC feature again, the driver needs to press the HDC button once again within the specified speed limits).The HDC should be enabled only on steep gradient. It is not recommended to be ON in plain road- to avoid accidental intervention. While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed, descent speeds can be varied by cruise buttons, accelerator pedal & brake pedal.
To Set the desired descending speed, follow the steps listed below:
•  SET Speed – This is the driver desired speed at which vehicle should descent. This can be set using HDC switch or brake/accelerator pedals.(example: when the driver activates HDC at a speed of 30 km/h, then set speed will be 30 km/h). HDC will limit vehicle descent speed to set value).
•  If driver presses the accelerator pedal and increases the speed from 30 km/h to 34 km/h and then releases the accelerator pedal. Now the new SET speed will be 34 km/h.
•  Similarly, if the driver applies brake and reduces the speed from 30 km/h to 10 km/h and then releases the brake pedal, now the new SET speed will be 10 km/h.
•  If the vehicle cruise speed is with in the HDC active region, similarly the set speed can be modified using cruise +/- buttons (by tapping the “SET —” or “SET +” buttons. Each press of the button will adjust the speed by approximately 0.5 km/h).
The descent speed increases only if the gradient is sufficiently steep to cause the vehicle to accelerate as the braking effect is reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing the “SET +” button may result in no speed increase.
12.17.4 Hill Hold Control (HHC)
Imagine a situation where your vehicle is stopped on an uphill incline. If you release the brake while moving off, there are chances that your vehicle may roll back. HHC helps in such situations by holding the vehicle from rolling back.Hill Hold Control function uses the in-built acceleration sensor to identify the gradient and holds the vehicle for 2 second in vehicles after the brake pedals are released. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.
The Following conditions must be met in order for the HHC to activate:
1. The Vehicle must be equipped with HHC
2. The vehicle must be on sufficient gradient
3. The Parking brake must not be applied
The HHC will function on both vehicle facing Up hill and vehicle facing downhill, provided the correct gears are selected.
•  Vehicle Facing Uphill – Gear should be in Forward
•  Vehicle Facing Downhill – Gear should be in Reverse
•  In some situations, when the conditions are not met, the HHC may not get activated. In such cases slight rolling may occur.
•  The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HHC system to prevent rolling.
12.17.5 Hydraulic Fade Compensation (HFC)
Due to continuous brake operations, the temperature of the brake disc may get raised, due to which the friction between the brake pads and the brake disc may get reduced alarmingly, this is known as Brake Fading.
HFC provides an additional braking-force boost to the driver, based on the pad temperature model, brake pressure and deceleration rate, to reduce the braking distances in such cases.
The HFC will activate only during high brake pedal force application.
•  The HFC system cannot prevent collisions, the capabilities of an HFC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety.
•  The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HFC feature to prevent road accidents.
12.17.6 Roll Over Mitigation (ROM)
Roll Over Mitigation system is a safety function which anticipates the wheel lift due to lateral forces. The ROM function analyses the rate of change of steering wheel angle and the wheel speed to determine any possible wheel lift, the system then applies appropriate brake and may also reduce the engine power to reduce the chances of wheel lift.
In any instance where physical limits of Long. and lateral tyre road grip are not exceeded, RMF reduces the lateral forces that will lead to a critical roll moment about the center of gravity.
Minimum Vehicle speed for ROM = 25 km/h
Maximum Vehicle speed for ROM = 120 km/h
•  Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.
•  ROM system cannot prevent all roll overs; thus ROM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
12.17.7 Brake Disc Wiping
When a vehicle is driven in a wet condition; the accumulated wetness on the brake disks leads to an elongated brake response time.
The BDW function actuates the brakes with a low pressure, such that; the brake pads comes in contact with the rotating brake disks, creating a wiping action; thereby removing the moisture from the brake disks.
For the brake disc wiping function to get activated, the following conditions must be met.
1. Vehicle speed above 70 km/h.
2. Accelerator Pedal must be pressed.
3. The wipers must be in ON condition (Low/High Speed).
The pressure generated in the BDW function is very small and this is not felt by the driver during normal driving conditions.
•  The system will not be able to sense water splashed on disc from situations such as water wash or water puddles.
•  It is suggested that the driver dry the brakes in the above said conditions by driving at very slow speed and applying the brakes lightly until the brake performance becomes normal.
12.17.8 Electric Brake Prefill - EBP
EBP is a value-added feature in ESP, the target of the function is to reduce the air gap of the wheel brake by putting low brake pressure to the brake pads such that the brake pads come in close proximity to the brake disc.
The system detects an emergency braking by monitoring the rate of release of the acceleration pedal. A sudden release of accelerator pedal signifies an upcoming sudden braking.
By actively pre-filling the brake-system, the brake response time is reduced for an upcoming braking and full vehicle deceleration is achieved earlier. This results in a shorter stopping distance.
12.17.9 Second Collision Mitigation System (SCM)
SCM feature in the ESP system is an autonomous braking system which decreases the speed of the vehicle after the first collision by means of autonomous braking interventions. This reduces the risk of a subsequent crash due to uncontrolled vehicle movement.
For the second collision mitigation feature to get activated, the following conditions must be met.
1. There must be a front collision detected with a certain severity, where airbags gets deployed.
2. The impact speed must be greater than approx. 10 km/h.
3. The brakes, the ESP and other required electrical systems remain functional after impact.
4. The accelerator pedal must not be actuated.
12.17.10 Uphill and Downhill Driving
To prevent the engine from labouring at a low r/min when driving uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily loaded, downshift when necessary to maintain engine r/min within the best torque range.
Similarly, while driving downhill, downshift to utilise the engine braking in an optimum manner.
12.18 Steering
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric power steering system (EPS). There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill. EPS uses energy from the battery to decrease the driver’s effort in steering the vehicle. The EPS system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of manoeuvrability in tight spaces. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will provide mechanical steering capability to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort.
When driving in rough/off roads, hold the steering wheel rim, do not hold the wheel spokes. A sudden bump can jerk/turn the wheel and injure your hand. This may also lead to loss of vehicle control.
The EPS warning light should only be illuminated with the ignition ON before starting the engine.
If the warning light remains illuminated after the engine has been started, there will be no assistance from power steering. The vehicle may be driven using the mechanical steering system although it is not recommended as the effort to turn the steering wheel will be significantly high. In this case, contact an Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Keep both hands on the steering wheel, with the thumbs resting on the outer wheel rim.
To help prevent damage to the power steering motor:
•  Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left for more than a few second when the engine is running.
If the Electric power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned OFF), you can still steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
•  Under inflated tyre(s) on any wheel(s)
•  Uneven vehicle loading
•  High crown in the centre of the road
•  High crosswinds
•  Wheels out of alignment
•  SAS (Steering Angle Sensor) calibration
•  Wheels out of balance
•  Loose or worn suspension components
12.18.1 Tilt Steering
Graphic
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both rake and reach as required using the lever in the steering shroud under the steering wheel.
To tilt/adjust the steering wheel:
Graphic
1. Pull the tilt lever down to unlock.
2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired position.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired position.
4. Push the tilt lever back up to its original position to lock the steering.
Improperly locked steering wheel could cause loss of control and lead to accidents. Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.
12.19 Steering Mode Control Switch
Graphic
When pressing the steering mode control switch, current steering mode comes on the display.
You can change the steering mode in sequence (COMFORT => NORMAL => SPORT) as shown on the right, by pressing the Steering Mode Control switch once more within 4 second. If the Steering Mode Control switch is not pressed within 4 second, the system will return to the previous mode.
The selected steering mode is still maintained after the ignition switch turned OFF and back ON.
EPS (Electronic Power Steering) system is mounted in the steering handle. This system includes functions to compensate the steering power, interlocking with ESP, the supplementary driving safety system, when cornering or braking on the road with different friction. You may feel the difference in steering when these functions are in operation.
12.19.1 Steering Mode Control
The smart steer system allows adjusting the steering power according to driver’s preference or road conditions.
3 levels (COMFORT, NORMAL, SPORT) of steering modes are available to select using the Steering Mode Control switch.
COMFORT Mode: COMFORT mode can be selected if you want smoother and more comfortable driving than NORMAL mode.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
NORMAL Mode: NORMAL mode is used for general driving with normal steering power.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
SPORT Mode: SPORT mode is suitable for sporty driving or while driving on a high way.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
12.20 Steering Controls - Audio
Steering Audio Operations
Graphic
A: Mute
E: Voice Command
B: Volume +
F: Up
C: Volume -
G: Down
D: Call Connect
H: Call Disconnect
•  SOURCE - Press SOURCE button to toggle between TUNER, USB, BT AUDIO and MYDRIVE.
•  VOLUME CONTROL - Press ‘+’ and ‘-’ button to increase or decrease the volume.
•  MUTE - Press MUTE button to mute audio while in TUNER mode and pause the song while in USB mode.
•  USB MODE - Press the seek button ‘UP’ / ‘DOWN’ moves to next / previous track of MP3 and video Playing.
•  TUNER MODE - Press the seek ‘UP’ / ‘DOWN’ button briefly: Manual Search, moves to selected channel. Press and hold the seek button ‘UP’ / ‘DOWN’ for 2 second to AUTO Search.
•  Call Connect - Press to accept incoming call to the paired BT phone.
•  Call Dis Connect - Press to reject or end active call to the paired BT phone.
•  Call Dis Connect - Press to activate Alexa or OK Google or Siri voice assistant.
•  Voice Command – Press the Voice command button to activate the voice recognition system.
12.21 Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without the need to keep your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for cruising on straight, open highways. Never use it for city driving, inclines, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain or in bad weather conditions.
It works on the closed loop system principle to maintain the set speed of the vehicle; the system controls the fuel injection of the engine in order to maintain the set speed.
Graphic
A
CRUISE ON/OFF
E
CLUSTER MENU
B
SET +
F
UP
C
SET –
G
ENTER
D
CRUISE RESUME
H
DOWN
Cruise control enhances your comfort while driving and allows you to effortlessly maintain the desired lane speed limit. Improper use of the cruise control can lead to an accident.
Cruise control is designed to operate above a vehicle speed of 35 km/h for all gears except 1st and reverse gears. The cruise lamp in the instrument cluster functions only if the cruise control is active.
Cruise control will function only under the following conditions:
•  The vehicle is cruising above 35 km/h.
•  Engine r/min above 1200 or above 1500.
•  Clutch pedal released.
•  Brake pedal released.
•  Subsequent cruise engagements can be done by RESUME SET+ buttons in the same ignition cycle.
Cruise control is deactivated under the following conditions:
•  CRUISE OFF button is pressed.
•  Brake or clutch pedal depressed.
If the vehicle speed exceeds the cruise set speed by 30 km/h by accelerator pedal intervention.
•  If vehicle speed is increased by 10 km/h for more than 30 second by pressing the accelerator pedal.
When Set+/Set- switch is pressed for more than 12 second (In this case, vehicle will not go into cruise mode in that ignition cycle. In order to restore the cruise function, switch OFF the ignition, wait for 30 second and switch ON the ignition)
Cruise influencing error not indicated by Check Engine Lamp, OBD lamp, etc.
12.21.1 Cruise Control Activation
Drive the vehicle to the desired cruising speed (any value greater than 35 km/h), press and hold the SET+ button until the cruise lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates.
If cruise is deactivated (e.g. by depressing brake to handle an intervention in the road etc.) in current driving cycle, reactivate the cruise to the last active cruise speed by pressing the RESUME button.
Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up or down hills, and the vehicle may come out of cruise control. This is indicated by the cruise lamp going OFF in the instrument cluster.
12.21.2 Cruise Control De-activation
You can cancel cruise control in any of the following ways:
•  Press the CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel
•  Press the brake pedal
•  Gear selector moved into neutral
•  HDC or ESP becomes active
12.21.3 SET + Button
SET + Button is used to activate cruise control and also to increase the cruise set speed.
To increase the speed in very small amounts, press the SET + Button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed increases by about 2 km/h. When you wish to continuously increase the cruising speed, press and hold the SET + Button and release when the desired speed is reached.
12.21.4 SET - Button
To decrease the speed in small amounts, press the SET - Button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed decreases by about 2 km/h.
When you wish to continuously decrease the cruising speed, press and hold the SET- Button. When the desired speed is reached, release the button.
If switch is pressed for more than 12 second, the switch is assumed to be malfunctioning and the cruise functionality ceases to function in that ignition cycle. To resume functionality, ignition has to be toggled.
The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver must at all times remain alert of road / traffic conditions and responsible for the vehicle brake operation / steering control.
Never activate cruise control in traffic or when driven in adverse road conditions (heavy rains, windy, slippery, etc).
12.21.5 RESUME Button
With the help of RESUME, you can opt for the previous set cruising speed of the vehicle in the same ignition cycle. This is best explained with the following example:
1. Assume, you have activated cruise mode and set the vehicle speed at 50 km/h.
2. Due to an obstacle or a sharp turn, you have deactivated the cruise mode by pressing the brake pedal.
3. Vehicle comes out of the cruise mode.
4. When the road condition is suitable to switch over back to cruise control mode, press RESUME button once. The system activates the cruise control mode to the previous cruising speed of 50 km/h.
5. To resume the previous cruise set speed, the vehicle speed should be above 35 km/h.
12.21.6 Override Function
This function enables user to ramp up the cruising speed to overtake front vehicle.
The cruising speed can be increased by using accelerator pedal. User has to complete this action within 30 second to maintain the cruise mode. If user exceeds the 30 second limit, cruise mode will be deactivated.
12.21.7 Standby Mode
If the brake pedal is pressed while cruise control is active, the cluster will display “Cruise Standby”, the driver can resume cruise control by simply pressing the RESUME button at any point during the current driving cycle.
12.22 Wheels and Tyres
12.22.1 Tyre Information
Graphic
A
RADIAL TYRES OR BIAS-PLY TYRE
B
“TUBELESS” OR “TUBE TYPE”
C
TYRE SIZE
D
MAX. LOAD LIMIT
E
TREAD WEAR
12.22.2 Tyre Rating
Your vehicle is originally equipped with tyres supplied by a reputable manufacturer. If you ever have any questions regarding your tyres, please refer to literature supplied by the tyre manufacturer, or to the separate tyre warranty provided by the tyre manufacturer. You may also contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center directly, or the tyre manufacturer.
The tyre rating of XUV 3XO CNG is:
•  205/65/R16 (or) 215/55/R17
•  Temporary Spare Tyre T135/90/R16 (If applicable)
Tyre rating is explained as below:
Graphic
Tyre size (Example: 205/65 R16 95H)
Callout (A) : 205 (Three-digit number) : This number gives the width in millimeters of the tyre from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. This is called as “Section Width”.
Callout (B) : 65 (Two-digit number) : This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tyres ratio of height to section width.
Callout (C) : R : This is the Tyre Construction Code. The “R” stands for Radial.
Callout (D) : 16 (Two-digit number) : This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
Callout (E) : 95 (Two or three-digit number) : This number is the tyres load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tyre can support.
Callout (F) : H : Tyre speed rating or speed symbol. Never drive the vehicle faster than the tyre speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tyre is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure.
Recommended for replacement of Tyre should be of same type of Tyre.
12.22.2.1 Speed Rating
SPEED SYMBOL
MAX. SPEED CAPABILITY
SPEED SYMBOL
MAX. SPEED CAPABILITY
km/h
km/h
L
120
T
190
M
130
U
200
N
140
H
210
P
150
V
240
Q
160
W
270
R
170
Y
300
S
180
Z
240+
12.22.3 Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard)
Graphic
Graphic
Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard) is located on the driver side inner B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about tyre size designed for your vehicle, and the tyre inflation pressures for the front and rear tyres.
XUV 3XO CNG VEHICLE COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSUREbar/psi/kPa
TYRE
205/65/R16 (or) 215/55/R17
R 16
2.2 / 32 / 220 (Front and Rear)
R 17
2.3 / 34 /234 (Front and Rear)
R 16 (Temp Tyre)
4.1 / 60 / 414
Never overload your vehicle. Overloading can cause tyre failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Improper inflated tyres can adversely affect vehicle handling or can fail unexpectedly, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
12.22.4 Tyre Pressure
Proper Tyre inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper Tyre pressure:
•  Safety
•  Economy
•  Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper Tyre inflation contributes to a comfortable and safe ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. Unequal Tyre pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response or may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the Tyre tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier Tyre replacement. Under inflation also increases Tyre rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
The proper cold Tyre inflation pressure is listed in the Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard), located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar.
12.22.5 Inspection and Adjustment Procedure
The Tyre pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as inspected for signs of tyre wear or visible damage, at least once a month. Use a good quality pressure gauge to check tyre pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tyres may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. At the same time, each tyre should be inspected for signs of tyre wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tyre inflation pressures. Cold tyre inflation pressure is defined as the Tyre pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 km after a three-hour period. Check tyre pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tyre pressures vary with temperature changes. Tyre pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 7 °C of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tyre pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.
When it was new, the spare tyre in your vehicle was fully inflated. However, a spare tyre can lose pressure over time. In order to avoid being stranded, check the spare tyre air pressure frequently.
12.22.6 Inflating Your Tyres
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tyres are properly inflated. Remember that a tyre can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat.
At least once a month or before long trips, inspect each tyre and check the tyre pressure with a tyre gauge (including spare tyre). Inflate all tyres to the recommended inflation pressure.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of Tyre failures and may result in severe Tyre cracking, tread separation or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the Tyre. It also may result in unnecessary Tyre stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents.
•  Over or under inflation may reduce the tyre life.
•  Do not correct the tyre pressure immediately after the vehicle is stopped after operation, server handling or long distance drive. Check the inflation pressure when the vehicle is idle for 3 hours or 10 minutes of driving after 3 hour in idle condition.
•  Do not drive the vehicle with lower pressure than recommended, which may lead to over heating of sidewall resulting in tyre damage.
•  Check the tyre pressures once in a month or before long distance travels.
•  Check your tyres regularly for any damages or cut on the sidewall. Please replace the tyres immediately.
Always inflate your Tyres to the recommended pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the Tyre. The recommended Tyre inflation pressure is found on the Tyre Label which is located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar. Failure to follow the Tyre pressure recommendations can cause uneven tread wear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
If you overfill the Tyre, release air by pushing the metal stem in the centre of the valve. Then recheck the pressure.
After inspecting or adjusting the tyre pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (If Equipped). This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the stem, resulting in an unexpected loss of Tyre pressure, an accident and/or personal injury.
12.22.7 Radial Ply Tyres
Combining radial ply tyres with other types of tyres on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury. Always use radial tyres in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tyres.
Cuts and punctures in radial tyres are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for radial tyre repairs.
12.22.8 Low Aspect Ratio Tyre (If Equipped)
Low aspect ratio tyres are designed for handling and braking. As a result, the sidewall of low aspect ratio tyres is slightly stiffer than that of a standard tyre. Also, the low aspect ratio tires are often wider, they have a larger contact patch with the road surface. When compared to regular tyres, they could occasionally produce more road noise.
To reduce the risk of damage:
•  To avoid damaging the wheels and tyres, drive carefully when driving on uneven terrain or over obstacles like potholes, speed bumps, manholes, or kerb stones. Damage is not covered under warranty.
•  Check the condition of tyre and pressure in every 3000 km.
•  Not easy to visually inspecting the tyre damage. If found in any damage, we recommend that contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center to replace the damaged tyre.
12.22.9 Tread Wear Assessment
Tyre wear can be assessed by looking the tyre wear indicator (TWI). The TWI will appear as a band across the tyre tread when the tyre wears out to the minimum allowed tread depth of 1.6 mm.
Tyre Wear Indicator (TWI)
Graphic
A mark of triangle in the tyre side wall indicates the position of the tyre wear indicators at 6 to 8 locations around the circumference of the tyre.
The TWI appear as raised portions inside the tread in a new or partially worn tyre (A).
As the tyre wears out to its minimum allowable tread depth, the TWI will appear as a band across the tyre tread (B).
The tyre should be replaced at this stage or before this stage.
New Tread (A)
Worn Tread (B)
Graphic
Graphic
It is extremely dangerous to drive with worn out tyres on wet roads/rainy seasons. The vehicle can skid and aquaplane on wet surfaces, if the tyre tread depth is insufficient.
Replace the tyre before the tyre tread depth reached the minimum acceptable limit.
12.22.10 Life of Tyre
The service life of a Tyre is dependent upon various factors including but not limited to:
•  Driving style
•  Tyre pressure
•  Distance driven
Tyres and the spare tyre should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden and unexpected tyre failure, leading to an accident and/or personal injury.
Keep dismounted tyres in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tyres from contact with oil, grease and fuels.
Do not use a tyre, wheel size or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle on the tyre placard. Combinations of unapproved tyres and wheels may change suspension geometric and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling, stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control of the vehicle or the tyre can unexpectedly fail, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.
Replacing original tyres with tyres of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
12.22.11 Snow Chains
Snow chains cannot be used on these tyres.
In case of harsh winter driving conditions, it is recommended using winter tyres with the same specifications for better stability, safety and performance.
12.22.12 Tyre Rotation Recommendations
Type 1 - Applicable for Steel wheel
Graphic
Tyres on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Follow the recommended tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving.
Type 2 – Applicable for Alloy Wheel
It is recommended rotating the tyres as per the “Maintenance Schedule”.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the diagram. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-road type tyres.
Graphic
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Follow the recommended tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving.
More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
12.22.13 Temporary Spare Wheel
Regular Tyre
Temporary Tyre
Graphic
Graphic
The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is for temporary purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running.
When Using the Temporary Spare Wheel
•  Temporary spare wheel provided specifically designed for your vehicle.
•  Do not use more than one temporary spare wheel simultaneously.
•  Drive the shortest possible distance with temporary spare wheel.
•  While using temporary spare wheel reduce speed, avoid sharp cornering, avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.
When Temporary Spare Wheel is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:
ABS, cruise control (if equipped), EPS, rear view monitor system (if equipped), navigation system (if equipped).
Speed Limit when using Temporary Spare tyre
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h when a temporary spare wheel is installed on the vehicle.
The temporary Spare Wheel is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
•  The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the temporary spare tyre compared to when driving with standard tyres. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.
•  Inflate the tyres as per manufacturers recommendation, refer tyre pressure label on the door panel.
•  TPMS is not provided in temporary spare wheel.
•  Do not fit tyre chains to the temporary spare tyre.Tyre chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
•  Tyre to be loaded within the max allowable load limit specified by the load rating index marked on the tyre.
•  Tyre to be operated with in the speed limit specified by the speed rating index marked on the tyre
•  The tread depth of temporary tyre is lesser compared to regular tyre. Hence do not use the temporary tyre for longer distance than recommended. Repair & refit the regular tyre as soon as possible.
•  Recommended to drive Max 50 km in a stretch or reach nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
12.22.14 Changing a Flat Tyre
Refer to “Changing a Flat Tyre” section in the Emergencies chapter for details.
12.22.15 Wheel Tightness
When you change a wheel, remove all rust and dirt at all locations where the wheel contacts the wheel hub. Use a scraper or wire brush to be sure that you remove all rust and dirt. A loose wheel could have damaged or elongated the holes in the rim, or damaged the rim/hub assembly. If any of the wheel studs or nuts are damaged, contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
Always tighten the nuts in a criss-cross sequence. Never use oil or grease on your wheel studs or nuts.
Never overtighten the nuts on the wheel stud. You could damage the stud or the nut.
Torque tighten the wheel nuts to the specified value at the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
The tyres fitted in this vehicle meet the requirements of BIS and they comply with the requirements under the Central Motor Vehicles Rules (CMVR) 1989.
12.23 Tiretronics (If Equipped)
The tiretronics system checks the pressure and temperature of the air inside the pneumatic tyres of the vehicle. System alerts the driver during driving if any of the tyre parameters are not in acceptable limits due to any reason.
The system will continue to alert until the warning condition is resolved to the actual placard values.
Appropriate tyre pressure and tyre temperature is required for:
•  Adequate braking
•  Road grip
•  Vehicle handling
•  Vehicle maneuvering
•  Reduced tyre wear and tear
•  Reduced tyre strain and safety
•  Good fuel efficiency
The cluster screen displays all alerts related to Tiretronics on the cluster screen and indicates the visual warnings for all Tiretronics alerts.
Graphic
Whenever low pressure or high pressure or Pressure leakage observed, corresponding tyre shall highlight and Low Pressure/High Pressure/Pressure Leakage message displayed in the cluster screen.
12.23.1 Operation of Tiretronics
Tiretronics uses wireless sensor technology that is mounted on the wheel rim to checks the tyre pressure levels. They transmit the data to the receiver inside the vehicle which is in turn is communicated and displayed on the instrument cluster.
In the cluster screen all the tyre locations will display the status as pressure and temperature except spare tyre.
Tiretronics has been customized only for the manufacturer’s genuine tyres and wheels. Tiretronics pressure limits and warning messages have been established and calibrated for the tyre size equipped on your vehicle. Replacement of manufacturer’s parts with a different size, type or style of components may damage the sensor and lead to incorrect readings.
Do not use aftermarket tyre sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with Tiretronics. Failure to comply may lead to sensor damage.
Tiretronics is not intended to replace normal tyre care and maintenance or to warn of any tyre failure condition. The system should not be used as a replacement for a pressure measuring gauge to adjust the vehicle tyre pressure.
Driving with under-inflated tyres cause the tyres to overheat and may lead to tyre failure. Under-inflated tyres reduce fuel efficiency, tyre tread life and may affect the vehicle’s maneuverability and braking ability.
It is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure using an accurate pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tiretronics warning indicator.
12.23.2 Tiretronics Warning Lamp
Graphic
Tiretronics warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates for any alert condition and also for low/high tire pressure alerts and malfunction.
12.23.3 Tiretronics Sensor Installation
Graphic
First apply lubricant (paste) or soapy water to rim hole or valve nozzle bar, as shown in the following figure (the diagram is for reference only, and it is operated according to the degree of automation of the customer’s production line).
Graphic
1. Line the sensor up with the rim hole and attach the TTV insertion tool to the end of the valve ready for pull in.
2. Ensure the TTV insertion tool is positioned to the correct notch and that the sensor is pulled through in a direction parallel to the valve whole axis and NOT at an angle to it.
3. The picture below shows a correctly fitted sensor. Note the rubber bulb of the valve resting against the rim and the front face of the enclosure is NOT touching the rim. Apply tyre soap solution to the rubber portion of the valve stem and the top of the enclosure.
Graphic
4. Place the inner tyre bead over the rim.
5. Place the outer tyre bead over the rim.
6. Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressure, check the valve area for leakage and re-balance the wheels prior to installing back on the vehicle.
Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. The fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it. Start from the opposite direction.
12.23.4 Tiretronics Sensor Removal
Graphic
1. Remove the tyre from the rim.
2. Remove the valve core to deflate the tyre.
3. Remove the tread and ensure that the extractor forceps is inserted into the tire at the yellow position shown below and turn the rim clockwise.
Graphic
Graphic
4. To remove the sensor, firstly remove the screw using a T6 TORX screwdriver.
Graphic
Graphic
5. Carefully and firmly pull the enclosure straight back off the valve.
Graphic
6. Cut the rubber bulb and attach the TTV tool to the valve. Remove the valve from the rim by pulling through the rim, or simply pull through without cutting the bulb.
7. Lift the outer tyre bead over the rim using a tyre tool.
The valve must be positioned just left of the start position to avoid sensor damage. Do not touch the sensor with the tyre tool.
8. Lift the inner tyre bead over the rim using the tyre tool
9. Remove existing valve stem
Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. Fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it. Start from the opposite direction.
12.23.5 Functionalities of Tiretronics System
•  Low Pressure Alert
•  High Pressure Alert
•  Pressure Leakage Alert
•  Sensor Signal Missing (Communication error)
•  Tiretronics Sensor Faulty.
Low Pressure Alert
Graphic
Low pressure monitoring is to indicate low tyre pressure. Please note the following points.
•  Low pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value goes below threshold also low pressure will be set based on the temperature value.
•  Low pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition.
•  If low pressure is observed, respective tyre should be rectified with cause of low pressure and then fill air.
•  Once low pressure alert is set with tyre pressure below threshold the alert shall not be cleared until the pressure is filled to the placard value.
High Pressure Alert
Graphic
High pressure monitoring is to indicate high pressure alert. Please note the following points.
•  High pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value goes to certain values.
•  High pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise the alert will remain in the tiretronics screen.
•  If high pressure value is observed, air has to be released from the respective tyre until the pressure reduces to the placard value.
•  The vehicle should be driven above 40 km/h for the new pressure value to be updated and the alert to be cleared.
•  Once the high pressure alert is triggered the alert shall not get cleared until the respective tyre pressure is reaches to the certain value.
Pressure Leakage Alert
Graphic
Pressure leakage monitoring is to indicate any pressure leakage in any of the vehicle tyres. Please note the following points.
•  The pressure leakage alert will be set only when the tyre pressure is leaking at a rate.
•  In the pressure leakage condition if the tyre pressure goes too low beyond the certain value then the low pressure alert will also be set.
•  The pressure leakage alert in the main alert screen will pop up once when the alert is set for driver notification and will be shown in tiretronics screen when the vehicle is in running condition/ignition ON condition.
•  Once pressure leakage is observed the respective tyre should be observed for air leakages and the puncture condition has to be rectified. Proper placard value should be filled after puncture rectification.
•  If the vehicle is running in an extremely rocky and acute bumpy condition then fluctuating pressure leakage alert may get set which will get rectified when the vehicle runs back on a normal road. This happens due to sudden change in pressure levels due to rocky conditions.
Sensor Signal Missing Alert
Graphic
When the vehicle is running in speeds between 40 km/h and 120 km/h then the tiretronics system should always keep receiving the signals from all of the running tyres.
•  On account of any issue in signal reception or tiretronics sensor damage or tyres changed with out performing manual learning then the signal will not be received.
•  Under such condition if the vehicle was driven for more than certain value without signal being received at least once, then ‘Signal missing’ will be set for respective tyre position on the cluster screen. Tiretronics cluster telltale is also illuminated to indicate the same.
•  When the tiretronics signal missing is set then perform manual learning once. If manual learning is not done successfully then the corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be checked by carefully opening the tyre.
•  If the sensor is found to be damaged then it should be replaced with a new one and manual learning should be done.
Sensor Faulty/ Low Battery Alert
Tiretronics sensor in the vehicle tyres has an internal individual battery to each sensor fixed. If the battery level is too low or the sensor by itself is malfunctioning then the tiretronics system shall give this alert.
•  If the tiretronics sensor low battery/faulty is set then the corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be removed by carefully opening the tyre and replacing it with a new sensor.
•  Post replacing the new sensor, manual learning should be done.
12.23.6 Tiretronics Learning
After a tyre rotation or tiretronics sensor replacement, the receiver must be learnt, else  the tiretronics warning lamp indicates a malfunction.
Mandate Points
Manual learning is the process by which the identities of 4 sensors installed inside the tyres are learnt and programmed in to the memory of the receiver module.
1. Manual learning should be compulsorily performed on any of the following conditions or operations done:
•  Any sensors replaced.
•  Any of the tyres are replaced.
•  If any of the tyres or set of tyres are shuffled or swapped in position.
•  If tyre rotation operation is performed.
•  If it is observed that the alert indications in the tiretronics in cluster screen are not co-relating with respect to their actual position in the vehicle.
2. Once manual learning is initiated, the sensors inside the tyres need to be triggered by leaking the air from each tyre one at a time and should be completed within certain value post to each event for learning all 4 tyres.
3. Do not perform Manual learning process at the same time on two vehicles with in the radius of 20 meter.
4. It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre.
5. It is required to ensure the tyres have pressure > 32 psi and < 36 psi before initiating the manual learning process.
6. Post manual learning, all tyres should be filled to the placard pressure value.
It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre’.
12.23.7 Tiretronics Learning Procedure
Initiating the Manual Learning Process
Graphic
1. Turn the ignition OFF. Press and hold the up button (^) in steering wheel.
2. Turn the ignition ON.
3. Wait for the cluster’s tachometer and speedometer to rotate to highest position and then release the enter button in up position. Then observe the cluster for the tiretronics telltale to blink, vehicle hazard lamps turn on for 2 times and cluster screen shows ‘TPMS MANUAL LEARNING’.
If failed to enter in to the manual learning mode:
•  Try initiating the manual learning once again.
•  Check if the reverse gear is engaged, if it is engaged disengage it.
•  Check if the Enter button is working fine.
If problem still persist, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for further assistance.
Graphic
Starting from Front Left Tyre: Start leaking the air from the front left for 30 to 40 second and stop for 5 second. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.
If the front left tyre is learned, vehicle hazard lamps flash once and the FL tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
Graphic
Learning the Front Right Tyre: Start leaking the air from the front right for 30 to 40 second and stop for 5 second. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.
If the front right tyre is learned, vehicle hazard lamps flash once and the FR tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
Graphic
Learning the Rear Right Tyre: Start leaking the air from the rear right for 30 to 40 second and stop for 5 second. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.
If the rear right tyre is learned, vehicle hazard lamps flash once and the RR tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
Graphic
Completing the Learning with Rear Left Tyre: Start leaking the air from the rear left tyre for 30 to 40 second and stop for 5 second. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.
If the rear left tyre is learned, vehicle hazard lamps flash once and the RL tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
Graphic
If rear left tyre is also learned, vehicle hazard lamps turn on for 2 times and ALL tyres show learned at respective tyre positions and ‘All four tyres Learned successfully’ in the cluster screen.
Graphic
If learning is not successful at any point of time, or at any point of time during the learning process if the learning takes more than 90 second of time for each tyre position then the system shall exit the learning mode and show the ‘TPMS Manual Learning Not Successful’ screen.
Limitations
•  Tiretronics monitors only tyre pressure and temperature. It does not monitor conditions such as tyre wear.
•  Tiretronics will not be able to detect an instant tyre burst and inform the driver in advance.
•  There may be the possibility of getting all the tyre location indicators on the tiretronics display blinking along with the tiretronics telltale, on passing environment area prone to heavy power lines and RF signal. It will come back to normal condition whenever interference gets cleared.
12.23.8 Tiretronics — Points to Remember
•  It is recommended to fill the pressure to 32 psi at a digital gauge station only
•  Every 15 days, inflate all the tyres up to 32 psi and inflation should be done at cold condition/ambient temperature
•  Pressure deviation between the tiretronics display and gauge will depend upon the following factors:
–  Atmospheric pressure
–  Error in pressure filling gauge (not calibrated)
–  Air leakage during inflation/deflation
•  Tiretronics measures the absolute pressure of the tyre, not relative pressure (gauge pressure)
•  Pressure deviation is defined for 0.5 psi (min) and 3 psi (max)
•  If the vehicle battery/fuse is disconnected and reconnected, it will update the pressure after the vehicle is driven or sensor is activated
•  It is mandatory that manual learning should be performed if the vehicle tyres are rotated or any of the tyres sensors are replaced, else the system will give a false alert with respect to false location
•  If more than one tyre needs to be learned, learn all 4 tyres as per manual learning procedure
•  Tiretronics is only a warning or indicating device. Pressure and temperature values displayed by the system is for indication prior to alert purposes only. The tiretronics system should not be used as a measuring device to correlate or calibrate against other systems
•  During winter or in cold conditions, there may be chances of getting a pressure alert with the corresponding tyre location indicator in the display, if the tyre pressure is near the thresholds level. i.e. between 28 psi to 24 psi. However, this alert will get cleared after driving a few kilometers depending upon the climatic condition
12.23.9 Recommended Placard Value
Ambient Temp °C
Recommended Pressure Front & Rear
<0
28
10
29
20
31
30
32
40
34
50
35
60
37
If the vehicle was previously halted for more than 45 minute & is driven less than 15 minute before filling the air then the tires shall be filled  to the respective placard as per the ambient temperature else to the next placard value.
Example: if a vehicle was halted at a ambient of 30 °C for 50 minute and  driven to a air filling station within 5 minute then respective play cared value will be 32.0 PSI for front & Rear. Else 33.5 PSI.
13 EMERGENCIES
13.1 Hazard Switch
•  The hazard warning flasher button is located in the central bezel switch bank.
Graphic
•  Press the button to turn ON the hazard warning flashers, all directional turn signals will flash to warn oncoming traffic.
•  This is an emergency warning system and should be used only when there is an emergency.
•  Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is a safety hazard for other motorists.
•  Hazard warning flasher will work in both ignition ON and OFF condition and even when the vehicle is fully locked.
With extended use, the hazard warning flasher may drain your vehicle battery
13.2 Towing
Front Tow Hook
Tow hook is provided on the front bumper.
Remove the cap, screw in the tow hook and tighten clockwise. Fasten a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles to the towing hook.
Graphic
Graphic
13.2.1 Towing Equipment
Towing Options
Variant
2WD
Front Tow Hook
ü
Rear Tow Hook
ü
Sling Type Towing (Front Wheel Lift)
ü
Flatbed Towing
Not recommended
Towing equipment are of two types:
•  Sling-type equipment - The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on both ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame or suspension and lift the end of the vehicle off the ground. This is not a good method of towing as it may damage the vehicle’s suspension and body. Avoid a tow with sling type equipment.
•  Flat-bed equipment - Your vehicle is loaded on the back of a truck. This is the safest and best way of towing.
Graphic
13.3 Emergency Assistance
In case of emergencies, driver/customer can follow the below steps to connect with our Emergency assistance service either from the car or through mobile phone.
Emergency Assistance from Vehicle
e-Call# (If Equipped)
In an unfortunate event of your car meeting with an accident, triggering the airbags, your XUV3X0 CNG will initiate the following actions:
Graphic
Graphic
1. A call will be triggered automatically from your XUV 3X0 CNG to 108* Ambulance Service for medical assistance.
Graphic
Graphic
2. Mahindra M4U team will call you back for support and guidance.
* [108] number is the default option. This number can be changed based on your preference/location. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
# This feature is available only in cars fitted with telematics unit.
On cars without telematics unit, this function will work if a mobile phone is paired through Bluetooth and connected to the car at the time of the incident.
13.4 Vehicle Does Not Start - Checks
Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the correct starting procedure and that you have sufficient fuel.
If the engine is not cranking or is cranking too slowly / intermittently:
1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are firmly fastened, switch ON the interior lamps.
3. If the lamps do not illuminate, glow dim or go OFF when the starter is cranked, then it indicates a weak or discharged battery. Try jump starting. Follow ‘Jump Starting’ instructions given later in this chapter.
4. Check the fuses in the Engine Compartment Fuse Box and Central Fuse Box.
If the engine cranks normally, but does not start:
If the lamp illumination is normal, engine is cranking normally, but the engine does not start even after repeated cranking, it needs adjustment or repair. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine for more than 15 second at a time. Wait 10 to 15 second before trying again.
If the engine stalls while driving:
Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place. Turn ON your hazard warning flashers and check for any malfunction lamps in the instrument cluster. Turn the ignition OFF, wait for approximately 90 second. and try starting the engine again. If the vehicle still does not start, contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
If the engine stalls while running, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be much harder than usual.
If the engine speed does not increase:
If the engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may be a problem in the Engine Management System, electrical or electronic controls. In case of certain faults, the engine may go to limp home mode, which is indicated by the check engine lamp. Have your vehicle checked by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center as soon as possible.
13.5 Engine Overheating
If the needle in the temperature gauge in the instrument cluster is all the way up to the H and/or the high engine coolant temperature warning lamp is ON, your engine has overheated. If the engine is getting overheated, the Engine Management System reduces engine power substantially and may even shut the engine OFF; it is dangerous to continue driving when the engine has overheated. You need to first cool the engine down before starting to drive again.
Follow the below instructions to cool the engine down:
•  Progressively reduce the vehicle speed and bring the vehicle to a stop at the side of the road.
•  Turn ON the hazard warning flashers.
•  Keep the engine running at idle.
•  Engage the parking brake.
•  Switch off the air-conditioner.
•  Wait till the engine coolant temperature drops sufficiently such that the needle in the temperature gauge is around halfway between C and H.
Now switch the engine OFF and carefully open the bonnet/hood to visibly inspect the engine cooling system parts. Be cautious while doing an inspection as vehicle parts will still be too hot. Verify that the engine coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is maintained between the ‘Min’ and ‘Max’ mark. Check for possible fluid leakages. Check for damages to heat exchangers and connecting hoses. Also verify that the radiator shrouds, engine fan blades and the engine belt all are in good condition.If any evidence of failure is observed, contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center for help. In case, no system leakage/ failure is suspected, driving can be continued.Either due to severe operating conditions or due to any system leakages or failures, the engine can get overheated. However, if the engine is getting overheated repeatedly, even in normal operating conditions, get the vehicle checked by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center as soon as possible.
Refer to the “High Engine Coolant Temperature” section under the “Instrument cluster features” chapter for details.
If the high engine coolant temperature warning is ignored, the engine shuts OFF abruptly to safeguard engine components from overheating and consequent failure. Abrupt engine shut-off can lead to uncontrollable driving condition and accidents.
Stay clear of hot and rotating vehicle parts while visually inspecting the vehicle. The coolant inside the cooling system is under high pressure and temperature. Never open the pressure cap of the degassing tank when the engine is hot. Not taking precautions may lead to serious injury to your skin/eyes.
For optimum performance of the cooling system, you must maintain the required coolant level and use only recommended engine coolant.
13.6 Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may be able to start the engine by using a standalone booster battery.
But before going ahead with this procedure ensure that the battery is the cause of vehicle not starting. To confirm this, few simple tests can be conducted as follows:
•  Check the headlights - Are they dim or bright? If they are dim, it’s likely your battery is dead. If your headlights are bright, you do not have a dead battery and a jump start may not help.
•  Try to start your vehicle -Does it turn over very slowly, or does it crank quickly? If it cranks quickly, you do not have a dead battery and a jump start may not help. If it cranks slowly, or not at all, you probably have a dead battery.
Open the bonnet and locate the battery (near the left side fender). Identify the positive and negative terminals.
•  The positive terminal will be marked with a plus sign (+) and will usually have a RED cable attached on it.
•  The negative terminal will be marked with a minus sign (-) and will usually have a BLACK cable attached to it
Check the physical condition of the battery. Inspect batteries for cracks, leaks or any other damage. If you find any of these things, do not jump start the vehicle. Call Mahindra Road Side Assistance or replace the battery. If the weather is very cold, remove the refill caps and check the condition of the electrolyte. If it seems slushy or like ice, do not attempt jump-starting until it thaws.
1. Wear safety gear (goggles or face guard and gloves) if you have it.
Graphic
It may be necessary to remove the disabled vehicle’s battery cables from the battery terminals and clean both cables and terminals. Use a stiff wire brush to remove all corrosion. Reconnect the cables to the battery terminals and jump the vehicle.
2. Untangle and unwind your jumper cables. Like your batteries, your jumper cables will probably have red and black cables and will have heavy duty clamps to connect to the battery terminals. You must make sure that the red and black ends of your jumper cables never touch each other once they are connected to the batteries; permitting them to do so can result in serious arcing and/or damage to vehicle.
3. Connect the jumper cables in the order described below:
•  Connect one red clamp of the jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
•  Connect other end of the red clamp to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
•  Connect one black clamp of the jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery.
•  Connect the other end of the black clamp to the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery.
•  Crank the engine for starting.
•  Once the vehicle gets started, carefully remove the jumper cables in the reverse order of attachment.
Graphic
Make sure none of the cables are dangling into the engine compartment, where they could be exposed to moving parts.
4. Remove the jumper cables once the vehicle starts. Do this in the reverse of the order in which they were attached, and don’t let any of the cables or clamps touch each other (or dangle into the engine compartment).
•  Disconnect the black clamp of the jumper cable from the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery.
•  Disconnect the other end of the black clamp from the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery.
•  Disconnect the red clamp of the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
•  Disconnect the other end of the red clamp from the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
Replace any positive (+) red post protective covers if applicable (You have had to remove or open these in the beginning) These covers help prevent accidental short circuiting of the battery.
5. Keep the recently-disabled vehicle’s engine running. Run the vehicle above idle (slightly revved up with your foot on the accelerator). This should give the battery enough charge to start the vehicle again. If it does not, you probably have a dead battery or a dying alternator.
Improper jump starting procedures can result in battery explosion and acid burn hazard.
Loosely connected battery cables could damage the electronic control units.
To disconnect battery terminals wait for at least 2 minute to allow discharge of high voltage or it could lead to personal injury.
While disconnecting, always disconnect the -VE terminal first and while connecting, always connect the -VE terminal last.
Do not connect battery terminals with opposite polarity, it will lead to alternator failure.
Towing a vehicle to start could be dangerous. The vehicle being towed could surge forward when the engine starts, causing the tow vehicles to collide, injuring the occupants.
Modern vehicles with electronic management systems should not be jump started without ‘protected’ jump starter leads.
13.7 Limp Home Mode
Limp Home Mode is an emergency situation declared by the EMS (Engine Management System) due to failure of one / more critical sensors / actuators. In this mode, the EMS (Engine Management System) will revert back to basic minimum requirement (fuel quantity/injection timings) to aid the driver to bring the vehicle back to the nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center. Needless to say, the drivability and fuel consumption will be greatly affected.If vehicle acceleration worsens or if there is a drop in vehicle performance, there might be a malfunction in the engine management system which triggers/activates the Limp Home Mode. This condition is accompanied by the check engine lamp illuminating in the instrument cluster. In this mode, the vehicle speed is limited and the accelerator pedal may not function normally. It is recommended you contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately for assistance.
13.8 Fuses & Relays
A fuse is the most common electric protection device. A fuse is placed in an electrical circuit, so that when current flow exceeds the rating of the fuse, it blows off.
The element in the fuse melts, opening the circuit and preventing other components of the circuit from being damaged by the over current. The size of the metal fuse element determines the rating. Once a fuse blows off, it must be replaced with a new one.
Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment OFF before touching or attempting to change a fuse.
The replacement fuse rating should be the same as the one you are replacing.
You can identify a blown fuse by a break in the filament. All fuses except high current fuses are push fit. A fuse puller should be used to remove the fuse from its position.
Graphic
Graphic
Fuse puller is available at the engine compartment fuse box.
13.8.1 Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Engine compartment fuse box is located adjacent to vehicle battery.
Graphic
Graphic
To open the fuse box cover, press the lock and push the cover back and lift it.
Spare fuses are provided in the fuse box for replacement of blown fuses. Ensure the correct rating fuse is replaced with the blown fuse.
Fuse Layout:
Graphic
FUSE NO.
CIRCUIT
FUSE RATING
F1
HFM/*EGR,FP,WIF /#INJ,BPS
15A
F2
#PHASER, VOB,PURGE VALVE
10A
F3
IGN COIL#
20A
F4
Fuel Pump
20A
F5
EMS B+
10A
F6
Horn
20A
F7
Spare
–
F8
Spare
–
F9
# INTERCOOLER FAN
10A
F 10
Spare
–
F11
Spare
–
F12
Spare
–
F13
CNG INJ
15A
F14
Cooling fan
40A
F15*
*Pre glow
60A
F16
Power Saver
40A
F17
Battery +VE I
50A
F18
AMPLIFIER
30A
F19
IGN I
40A
F 20
Main
30A
F21
Spare
–
F22
Spare
–
F23
Spare
–
F24
ABS 2
30A
F25
Spare
–
F26
Spare
–
F27 to F29
Spare
–
F30
SHIFT SOL (AT)
5A
F31
TCU(AT/AMT)
15A
F32
AC COMP
10A
F33
Spare
–
F34
Head lamp High RH
15A
F35
Head lamp High LH
15A
F36
Spare
–
F37
Blower
40A
F38
ABS –I
50A
F39
MBFM-1
60A
F40
BATT +VE 2
50A
F41
MBFM-2
60A
F42
Starter Accessory
40A
F43*
AMT*
30A
F44*
Oil Pump* & Piston JET
10A
F45*
WP*, WGV # & DUMP/CNG PR.REG@
10A*15A@
F46
Stop Lamp SW
10A
F47*
AC Pressure SW
10A
F48
*NOX,PM/#LSF
10A
MIDI FUSE ALT +
150A
MIDI FUSE EPS
80A
BAT +
–
* - DIESEL, #– Gasoline, @ Applicability
RELAY NO.
CIRCUIT
R1
Spare
R2
Spare
R3
Spare
R4*
Pre Glow
R5
Spare
R6
Spare
R7
Spare
R8
Spare
R9
AC Compressor
R10
SHIFT SOL (AT)
R11
Spare
R12
INTERCOOLER FAN(TGDI) @
R13
Spare
R14
Main
R15
Blower
R16
Spare
R17
Spare
R18
Cooling Fan High
R19
Cooling Fan Low
R20
Starter
R21
Spare
R22
Spare
R23*
SCR
R24
Spare
R25
Spare
R26
Horn
R27
Fuel Pump
* - DIESEL, @ – Gasoline
13.8.2 Instrument Panel Fuse Box
This fuse box is located below the instrument panel on the driver side. To access the fuse box, pull out the top panel as shown in the image.
Graphic
Graphic
Fuse Layout:
Graphic
FS NO.
CIRCUIT
FUSE RATING
FS1
MBFM-1
25A
FS2
*INFOTAINMENT
15A
FS3
CLUSTER,HVAC, *S/VISOR LAMP, *RLS, *LUGGAGE LAMP
10A
FS4
ESCL
5A
FS5
*ROOM LAMP, *MAP LAMP, *SVS ECU
5A
FS6
Reverse Lamp
10A
FS7
Cluster EPS, PKE, IMMO
10A
FS8
*WLC,FR USB
10A
FS9
MBFM-IGN
10A
FS10*
PKE
5A
FS11, FS12 & FS13
Spare
-
FS14
P/OUTLET
30A
FS15
SBW/TGS
10A
FS16
*INFOTAINMENT-ACC, *RR USB
10A
FS17
HLLD
10A
FS18
*GATEWAY, *IRVM, *AMPLIFIER(IGN)
10A
FS19
AIRBAG ECU, PAB-OFF SW, *WLC(IGN)
10A
FS20
*RVC, INFO, *FVC, *SVS ECU, HEAD LAMP(IGN)
10A
FS21
MBFM — 3
30A
FS22
MBFM — 2
30A
FS23
MBFM — 5
30A
FS24
MBFM – 4
30A
FS25
CCM
15A
FS26
HVAC
10A
FS27
PKE, Sunroof SW-
5A
FS28
*SUN RF MOTOR, *OHC SW
20A
FS29*
PKE
15A
FS30
DIAGNOSTIC, *GATEWAY, *IMMO
10A
FS31
–
–
FS32
Spare
10A
FS33
Spare
20A
FS34
Spare
10A
FS35
*ORVM, *EPB SW, *AMPLIFIER-ACC
10A
FS36
START/T50
10A
FS37
ABS, *FRM
10A
FS38
EMS
10A
FS39
Spare
10A
FS40
Blower RLY COIL
10A
FS41
Spare
–
FS42
Power Window LH
25A
FS43
Spare
15A
FS44
Power Window RH
25A
*BASED ON APPLICABILITY
13.9 Changing a Flat Tyre
•  In the event of a flat tyre while driving, gradually reduce the vehicle speed and maintain a straight path.
•  Carefully steer the vehicle off the road to a safe location away from traffic.
•  Park on a level, firm surface, stop the vehicle, and switch ON the hazard warning flashers.
•  Firmly apply the parking brake. Ensure that all occupants exit the vehicle from the side away from moving traffic and move to a safe location.
Never stop the vehicle in a traffic lane to change a flat tyre, as this can put you at risk of being struck by passing vehicles. Continue driving slowly and carefully until you reach a safe location away from traffic before stopping to replace the tyre..
Lifting a vehicle to change a tyre or carry out maintenance can be extremely hazardous without the proper tools, safety equipment, and training.
The jack supplied with the vehicle is intended solely for replacing a flat tyre with the spare tyre.
Do not use it for any other maintenance, inspection, or repair work on the vehicle.
Never place any part of your body under any portion of the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. You could be crushed by the vehicle if it falls off a jack. Keep bystanders away from the vehicle.
Park the vehicle on level, firm ground away from traffic. If a safe stopping location is not immediately available, it is safer to continue driving slowly on the flat tyre and risk damaging the wheel rim than to stop in an unsafe area where you could be struck by passing traffic.
After replacing the flat tyre, do not store the removed tyre, jack, or any related equipment in the passenger compartment. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, loose objects can cause injury to occupants.
Ensure that all tyres and tools are securely stored in their designated storage locations.
The following sections outline the procedure for changing a flat tyre:
13.9.1 Warning Triangle
•  The warning triangle is a necessary device for your safety.
•  It is placed in the luggage compartment.
•  When you pull over your breaking down vehicle to a safe place, set up a warning triangle behind your vehicle. (Daytime: 100 Metres behind, Night: 200 metre behind)
When the Vehicle has a Serious Problem during Driving
•  Turn on the hazard flasher and move the vehicle out of traffic to a safe place.
•  Set up the warning triangle behind your vehicle (Daytime: 100 metre, Night: 200 metre) to warn other vehicles.
•  Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay away from the traffic.
•  When your safety is secured, contact your Authorized Mahindra Service Center for your emergency service.
13.9.2 Tool Kit
The toolkit organizer is located above on either side of the CNG tank, which is positioned at the rear of the vehicle.
Remove the floor mat to access the tool kit organizer.
The below tools are available in the organiser.
Graphic
A
Jack
B
Screwdriver
C
Jack Operating Lever
D
Tow Bar
E
Spanner
F
Wheel Spanner
G
Spare Wheel removal tool.
13.9.3 Spare Wheel Removal
1. Spare wheel is located below the vehicle floor panel at the rear end of the vehicle. It is held in place by a securing nut underneath the rear luggage compartment floor carpet.
2. Locate the securing nut below the rear luggage compartment floor carpet.
Graphic
•  Select the appropriate spanner from the toolkit and position it correctly on the securing nut, as shown in the images below.
Graphic
Graphic
3. Loosen the securing nut anti-clockwise to winch down/lower the secured spare wheel to the ground.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
•  Tilt and Remove the securing bracket out of the spare wheel hub.
•  Remove/pull away the spare wheel.
The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is for temporary purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running.
When using the temporary spare wheel
•  Temporary spare wheel provided is specifically designed for your vehicle.
•  Do not use more than one temporary spare wheel simultaneously.
•  Drive the shortest possible distance with temporary spare wheel.
•  While using temporary spare wheel reduce speed, avoid sharp cornering, avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.
•  Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h when a temporary spare wheel is installed on the vehicle.
The temporary Spare Wheel is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
13.9.4 Wheel Bolt Loosening
Wheel cover Removal (If Equipped)
Wrap the tip of a screw driver with cloth, insert it near the lugs of the wheel cover and pry the cap away from the wheel.
Do not try to pry off the wheel cover by hand alone. Take due care in handling the wheel cover to avoid unexpected personal injury.
Graphic
•  Always loosen the wheel bolts before raising the vehicle.
•  Turn the wheel bolts anti-clockwise to loosen as per the crisscross sequence shown.
•  To get maximum leverage, fit the spanner to the bolt, so that the handle is on the left side.
•  Grab the spanner near the end of the handle and push down on the handle.
•  Be careful that the spanner does not slip off the bolt.
•  Do not remove the bolts, but loosen them by one or two turns.
Do not apply force with your legs (or stand) on the wheel spanner while loosening/tightening the wheel bolts.
13.9.5 Jack Points
Front jack point - On the side sill in-between the groove available on the sill cladding just behind the front wheels.
Graphic
Rear jack point - On the side sill in-between the groove available on the sill cladding just in front of the rear wheels.
Graphic
Make sure to instal the jack so that its upper plate is correctly seated under the vehicle’s positions marked in the figure for the flat tyre side.
13.9.6 Jacking Operation
•  Position the jack at the correct jacking point. Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid ground. Ensure no one is in the vehicle.
•  Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tyre to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.
•  When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.
Graphic
A : Flat Tyre
B : Chock Blocks
•  To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle end along with the wheel spanner into the jack and turn it clockwise with the jack handle.
•  As the jack touches the vehicle and begins to lift, check that it is properly positioned. Raise it high enough so that the spare tyre can be installed.
•  Remember, you will need more ground clearance when putting on the spare tyre than when removing the flat tyre.
Graphic
Make sure to set the jack properly in the jacking point. Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned jack will damage the underbody of the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.
•  Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel changing.
•  Do not raise the jack with someone in the vehicle.
•  When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top or underneath the jack.
•  Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the wheel.
•  Usable extended height of jack is up to the yellow line/mark provided in the jack. Do not raise the jack above the yellow line.
•  Follow jacking instructions.
•  Do not start or run the vehicle while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.
•  Remove the wheel bolts.
•  Lift the flat tyre straight off and place it aside.
•  Roll the spare wheel into position and align the holes in the wheel with the holes on the hub.
•  Lift up the wheel and get at least the top bolt aligned through its hole. Wiggle the wheel and fix the other bolts.
•  Re-instal the wheel bolts inward and tighten by hand. Press the wheel inward and tighten the wheel bolts further.
Graphic
Never use oil or grease on the bolts. Doing so may lead to over tightening of the bolts, wheel nut spanner slip, damage the bolts and also may cause personal injuries. Also, bolts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt, clean before installing.
•  Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the diagonally opposite wheel bolts using the wheel nut spanner.
Graphic
•  Turn the jack handle extension anti-clockwise using the jack handle to lower the vehicle, making sure the handle remains firmly fitted onto the jack handle extension.
•  Make sure the wheel spanner is securely engaged over the bolt.
•  Tighten each bolt a little at a time in the diagonally opposite order as shown.
•  Repeat the process until all the bolts are tight.
•  Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.
Improperly or loosely tightened wheel bolts are dangerous. The wheel could wobble or come off. This could result in loss of vehicle control and cause a serious accident. Always make sure all the wheel bolts are properly/securely tightened to the specified torque.
When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body are clear off the vehicle as it is lowered to the ground. Have the wheel bolts tightened with the torque spanner to 120 Nm, as soon as possible after changing wheels.
If you have rotated, repaired, changed your tyres or changed the wheel rims, check the wheel bolts are still tight after driving about 1 000 km (Torque 120 Nm).
•  Put the wheel cap (If Equipped) into position aligning the nozzle on the wheel to the nozzle clearance on the wheel cover.
•  Tap it firmly on the sides with your hand to snap it into place.
•  Check the air pressure of the replaced tyre.
•  If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure.
•  If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tyre pressure.
•  If the cap is not replaced, dirt and moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and instal it as soon as possible.
13.9.7 Restore the Tools, Jack and Flat Tyre Securely
Mount the flat tyre to the spare wheel securing bracket below the floor panel and turn the securing nut available in luggage compartment clockwise o winch up the flat tyre until its secured. Restore the tools and jack back to their respective locations.
The wheel balance and alignment differ from wheel to wheel which may lead to difference in steering and braking. It is recommended to fix the flat tyre at the nearest tyre shop and swap the spare wheel back.
Wheel balancing and alignment to be done after tyre puncture rework.
Steering centering calibration (Steering Angle Sensor) to be performed if you have done Wheel Alignment, repaired, changed your tyres or changed the wheel rims. Contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for assistance.
14 MAINTENANCE
14.1 Dimensions
Dimensions
mm
Wheel Base
2600
Overall Length
3990
Overall Width
1821
Overall Height
1647
Track Width (Front)
1550
Track Width (Rear)
1563
Front View
Graphic
Rear View
Graphic
Side View
Graphic
14.2 Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
 
Gasoline / CNG
ENGINE
G12 1.2 Litre
Displacement/Cubic Capacity
1197 cm3
Type
Transverse
Compression Ratio
10 (+/- 0.5):1
Max. Engine output, (kW @ r/min)
82 kW @ 5000 r/min
Max. Torque (Nm @ r/min)
200 Nm @ 1500 - 3500 r/min
TRANSMISSION
Type
Manual Transmission (MT)
 
No. of Gears
6 Forward, 1 Reverse
STEERING
Type/Description
Electronic Power Steering (EPS)
SUSPENSION
Type/Description
Front: McPherson Strut with Double acting Hydraulic Shock Absorber
Rear: Coil Spring with Twist Beam Double acting Hydraulic Shock Absorber
BRAKES
Service Brake
Hydraulic Circuit Assisted by Vacuum Booster cross diagonal circuit with ABS and ESP
Front/Rear
Disc
Parking Brake
Mechanical-Hand Operated (Conventional Type)
WHEELS and TYRES
Rim
6J x 16
Tyres
Regular 205/65 R16 95HSpare Wheel - T135/90, R16
Type
Radial Tubeless
Laden Tyre PressureFront and Rear
32 Psi (for R16 tyre)
FUEL
Fuel Capacity (Gasoline)
42 ± 2 Litre
Fuel Capacity (CNG)
60 (30+30) Litre
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
System Voltage
12V
Battery
60Ah (Opt: 50Ah)
14.3 Bulb Specification
S. No
Lamp Functions
Source
No of bulbs per vehicle
1
DRL / Position*
LED
2
2
Position*
LED Light Guide
2
3
Low Beam*
HB3
2
4
High Beam*
HB3
2
5
Low / High Beam*
LED
2
6
Front Turn Indicator Lamp
LED light guide
2
7
Rear Turn Indicator Lamp
LEDs
2
8
Side Turn Indicator Lamp
LEDs
2
9
Cornering*
LEDs
2
10
Rear Position Lamp Tail Gate*
LEDs
2
11
Rear Position Lamp
LEDs
2
12
Stop Lamp - Body Side
W21W
2
13
Reverse Lamp
W16W
2
14
Registration Plate Lamp
LEDs
2
15
High Mounted Stop Lamp
LEDs
1
14.4 General Owner’s Information
Your vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time and money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day-to-day care is more important to ensure a smooth, trouble-free, safe and economical operation. It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance, including general maintenance service is performed. Note that both the new vehicle limited warranty and emission control system limited warranties specify that proper maintenance and care must be performed. See Warranty and Service Information Guide for complete warranty information.
Where to go for service?
Mahindra technicians are well trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and in Authorized Mahindra Service Center training programmes. They learn to work on Mahindra vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than while they are working on it.
You can be confident that Authorized Mahindra Service Center does the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle reliably and economically.
Get the most from your vehicle with routine maintenance: Routine maintenance is the best way to help ensure you get the performance, dependability, long life and better resale value you expect from your vehicle. This is exactly why we’ve put together this Maintenance Section. It outlines the services required to properly maintain your vehicle and when they should be performed. The focus is on maintaining your vehicle while it’s running great, which goes a long way toward preventing major repairs and expenses later.
Here are a few suggestions to help you get started on routine maintenance:
•  Familiarize yourself with your vehicle by going through your Owner’s Manual.
•  Take a few minutes to review this Maintenance Section.
•  Make it a habit to use this manual to record scheduled maintenance in the warranty and Service Information Guide.
•  Consult a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for all your vehicle’s needs.
Suggestions for Obtaining Service for your Vehicle
Prepare for the Appointment: If you have warranty work to be done, be sure to have the right papers with you. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history.
Prepare a List: Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the Service adviser/Relationship manager know about it.
Be Reasonable with Requests: If your list has several items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the Service adviser/Relationship manager and list the items in order of priority.
Need Assistance: It is recommended talking to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center, Service Manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
If a Authorized Mahindra Service Center is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact any Mahindra Customer Care Executive. They would need the following information:
Owner’s name and address, owner’s telephone number (home and office), Authorized Mahindra Service Center name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), vehicle delivery date and mileage.
Warranty Information: Read the Warranty Information given in the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’ for the terms and provisions of Mahindra warranties applicable to this vehicle. Mahindra genuine parts, fluids, lubricants and accessories are available at any Authorized Mahindra Service Center. They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
Protect your Warranty: Routine maintenance is not only the best way to help keep your vehicle performing as intended, it’s also the best way to protect your warranty. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specified in the warranty and Service Information Guide will invalidate warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance. We can’t stress enough how important it is to keep records of all maintenance. Damage or failures due to neglect or lack of proper maintenance are not covered under warranty.
Keeping maintenance records is easy with the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’.
It’s important to document the maintenance of your vehicle. For your convenience to maintain records of service, the scheduled maintenance coupons are provided in the service coupon booklet. Every time you bring your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance, be sure to present this booklet and certify the work. Also record the date of service and mileage at the time of service. This will make record keeping easy and, should your vehicle ever require warranty coverage, you will have all the documentation to show you’ve properly maintained it.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing: In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic by itself, and does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at Authorized Mahindra Service Center. Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair.
Chemicals and Additives: Non-Mahindra approved chemicals or additives are not required for factory recommended maintenance. In fact, Mahindra recommends against the use of such additive products unless specifically recommended by Mahindra for a particular application.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features. That’s why it’s important to rely on your Authorized Mahindra Service Center to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
When planning your maintenance services, consider a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for all your vehicle’s needs.
Get the most from your Service and Maintenance visits: Getting your vehicle serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center adds great value to your vehicle in number of ways. Hence, it is recommended to service your vehicle at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center only.
Maintenance Interval: Mahindra establishes recommended maintenance intervals based upon engineering testing to determine the most appropriate mileage to perform the various maintenance services. This protects your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you. Mahindra recommends that you do not deviate from the maintenance schedules presented in this Maintenance Schedule.
Vehicle Self Maintenance - General Precautions:
•  Refer to relevant sections of the manual before starting.
•  Set the parking brake.
•  Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
•  Turn OFF the engine and remove the key.
•  Stay clear of hot vehicle parts.
•  Avoid repeated contact with fluids.
•  Do not let fuel, coolant and other fluids spill over electrical and hot vehicle parts.
•  Keep all open flames and other burning material like cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel-related parts.
Do not start/run the engine when any engine/peripheral parts are removed.
14.5 Engine Compartment
Petrol / CNG
Graphic
A
Front Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
D
Brake Fluid Reservoir
G
Battery
B
Degassing Tank
E
Dipstick
H
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
C
Engine Oil Cap
F
Air Filter
   
14.6 General Maintenance
Exercise extreme caution when the hood is open and engine is ON.Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed frequently. In addition to checking the items listed below, if you notice any unusual noise, fluid leakages, smell or vibration, you should investigate the cause or take your vehicle to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you intend to run the engine.
In the Engine Compartment:
•  Front windshield washer fluid level
•  Engine coolant level
•  Battery condition
•  Brake/Clutch fluid level
•  Engine oil level
•  Fluid leaks
•  Hoses, joints and pipes for any abnormalities
Inside the Vehicle:
•  Lights
•  Warning lamps
•  Windshield wipe and wash
•  Steering wheel
•  Seats
•  Seat belts
•  Accelerator pedal
•  Brake pedal
•  Brakes
•  Parking brake
•  Gear lever shift mechanism
Outside the Vehicle:
•  Lamps
•  Fluid leaks
•  Doors and engine hood latches
•  Tyre inflation pressure
•  Tyre surface/thread and wheel nuts
14.7 In the Engine Compartment
14.7.1 Fluid Leaks
Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapour or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected immediately.
14.7.2 Engine Oil
Engine oil has the primary functions of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine. It plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order. Therefore, it is essential to check the engine oil regularly.
14.7.3 Engine Oil Consumption
It is normal for engines to consume some engine oil during operation.
Causes of consumption in a normal engine are as follows:
•  Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders. Thin films of oil, left over when pistons move in cylinders, are sucked into the combustion chamber due to high negative pressure generated when the vehicle is decelerating. This oil gets burnt in the combustion chamber.
•  Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of intake valves. Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the intake air and is burnt there.
•  Engine oil consumption depends on the operating conditions in which the vehicle is driven. Oil consumption will be more due to high speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration. A new engine may consume more oil since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls are not conditioned.
14.7.4 Checking/Topping the Engine Oil
•  Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
•  Turn the engine OFF and wait a few minutes for the oil to settle down into the oil sump.
•  Apply the parking brake.
•  Open the hood, use stay rod to support the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
•  Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick.
•  Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
•  If the oil level is between “Min” and “Max” marks, the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
•  If the oil level is below or near the “Min” mark, add enough oil through the oil filler cap to raise the level within the “Min” and “Max” marks. Wait for few minutes after every top-up for the oil to settle down before checking the level.
Petrol / CNG
Graphic
•  Oil levels above the “Max” mark may cause engine damage/poor performance.
•  Put the dipstick and the oil filler cap back and ensure it is fully/properly seated.
Petrol / CNG
Graphic
To avoid possible oil loss and injury due to hot blow-by gas, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Draining/Changing of engine oil should always be done by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
14.7.5 Checking/Topping Engine Coolant Level
Graphic
•  Park the vehicle on flat-horizontal surface. Keep the parking brake fully engaged. Shut-off the engine.
•  Wait till the engine cools down and hence coolant temperature comes down to normal room temperature.
Graphic
•  The coolant level should be between “MIN” and “MAX” marking provided on the degassing tank.
•  In case the coolant level is below the “MIN” marking, the coolant should be topped-up.
•  The coolant should be filled till the level rises above the “MIN” but remain below the “MAX” marking on the degassing tank.
•  However, if the degassing tank is found to be near empty, it is recommended that the system be checked at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
Kindly refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Engine Coolant capacity and grade.
Top-up only with recommended Ready To Use (RTU) coolants for ensuring performance, anti-freezing and corrosion protection. Do not add water directly. Mixing with other brand of coolants is not recommended and should be avoided.
Draining or changing of engine coolant should always be done by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
Never open the pressure cap when the engine is hot. Hot coolant may splash resulting in serious personal injury or severe burns by the erupting liquid.
14.7.6 Checking/Topping Brake/Clutch Fluid
Graphic
The brake and clutch systems are supplied fluid from the same reservoir (Applicable for manual transmission vehicle).
Graphic
The brake fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced. Fluid levels between the “MIN” and “MAX” lines are within the normal operating range; there is no need to add fluid.
If the fluid levels are below the “MIN” mark, the performance of the systems could be compromised; the brake/clutch operation could be spongy and gear change harder. Top-up the recommended brake/clutch fluid till the “MAX” mark or contact a Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.
Carefully clean the cap on the reservoir before you remove it and be sure no debris fall in the reservoir. Do not keep the reservoir open for longer than necessary to add brake fluid.
Use only brake/clutch fluid that meets Mahindra specifications.
Kindly refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Brake/Clutch Fluid capacity and grade.
Draining or changing of brake fluid should always be done by a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
14.7.7 Windshield Washer Fluid Top-up
Top-up the windshield washer reservoirs as and when required.
Graphic
The windshield washer is located behind the RH Head lamp in the engine bay.
In very cold weather conditions, fill the reservoir with washer fluid premixed with anti-freeze.
If you operate your vehicle in very low temperatures, use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
14.8 Maintenance - Inside the Vehicle
Lights: Make sure the Head lights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights and other lights are all working. Check headlight aim.
Warning Messages and Lamps: Check all warning lamps appearing in the instrument cluster. Refer to the relevant sections in this manual for further details.
Seats: Check that all seat controls such as seat adjusters, seat back recliner, etc. operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in any position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position.
Seat Belts: Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
Accelerator Pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation, uneven pedal effort or stickiness. Check the foot well and remove obstructions, if any.
Brake/Clutch Pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and proper clearance. Check the foot well and remove obstructions, if any.
14.9 Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle
The following checks should be carried out from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
Lamps: Check and ensure proper functioning of all exterior lamps.
Fluid Leaks: Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapor or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected immediately.
Doors and Engine Hood: Check all doors and latches including the tailgate for proper functioning. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
Tyre Inflation Pressure: Check the tyre pressure with a pressure gauge every week.
14.10 Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a Mahindra genuine battery. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. To prevent corrosion, apply petroleum jelly to the battery terminals. Tighten loose terminals and hold down clamp nuts only enough to keep the battery firmly in place. Tightening excessively may damage the battery terminals.
14.10.1 For Best Battery Service
•  Keep the battery securely mounted.
•  Keep the battery top clean and dry.
•  Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
•  Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.
Do not disconnect battery terminals while the engine is running. This will adversely affect all electronic controllers.
While removing the battery, always disconnect the negative terminal first. And while installing the battery, ensure the negative terminal is connected last.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time. This will minimise the discharge of your battery during storage.
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery acid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in the eyes or on the skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep any flame or spark away from the vent holes.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead components. Wash hands after handling batteries.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock (If Equipped) and the preset radio (If Equipped) stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected.
The replacement battery must meet the specification of the originally fitted battery.
14.11 Wiper Blades
Lift the wiper arm from its position. Expose the blade lip for inspection. Clean the wiper blade lips with water applied with a soft sponge. If the wiper blade is not wiping the glass satisfactorily or is worn-out, cut, cracked or bulging, get it replaced at a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
14.11.1 Changing the Wiper Blade
1. Lift the arm and position the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm.
Graphic
2. Press the retaining clip in the opposite direction, disengage the wiper blade and pull it off the arm.
Graphic
3. Hold the end of the rubber and pull until the tabs are free of the metal support.
4. Carefully insert the new blade rubber. Then instal the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.
To prevent damage to the windshield, don’t let the wiper arm slap down on to it.
14.12 Appearance Care and Protection
14.12.1 Washing the Exterior
•  Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH soap.
•  Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces.
•  Never wash a vehicle that is ‘hot to the touch’ or during exposure to strong, direct sunlight.
•  Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results.
•  Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting.
•  It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle.
•  Immediately remove items such as Petrol fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits; they can cause damage to the vehicle’s paint work and trim over time.
14.12.2 Engine Compartment
Graphic
Do not wash the engine or engine compartment with pressurised water.
14.12.3 Exterior Chrome
•  Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo.
•  Use the custom bright metal cleaners, available at Authorized Mahindra Service Center. Apply the product as you would wax to clean chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes, and then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
•  Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can leave scratches on the chrome surface.
•  After polishing the chrome parts, you can also apply a coating of Premium Liquid Wax, available at Authorized Mahindra Service Center, or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental effects.
14.12.4 General
•  Do not wipe the painted surface with a dry cloth/ dirty cloth.
•  Ensure all cameras, radars, and sensors are free from obstruction before, during, and after vehicle washing.
14.12.5 Waxing your vehicle
•  Wax the high gloss painted surface of your vehicle once or twice a year.
•  We recommend that you only use an approved quality wax that does not contain abrasives.
•  For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact a Mahindra authorized dealer.
•  When washing and waxing, park your vehicle in a shaded area out of direct sunlight.
•  Avoid waxing unpainted or low-gloss black coloured parts, they discolour over time.
14.12.6 Polishing
•  Polishing should be performed only when the vehicle’s paint appears dull and adequate gloss cannot be restored using waxing materials.
•  If the polishing agent used does not contain preservative components, ensure the vehicle is waxed afterward to protect the paint surface.
•  Do not apply polishing agents or hard wax on unpainted parts or plastic components.
14.12.7 Do’s and Dont’s
•  Vehicle should be washed using a car shampoo that has a mild neutral (Zero) pH with a clean sponge or microfiber cloth to avoid scratching the vehicle’s surface.
•  Do not use detergent or hard shampoos when washing the vehicle, as they can damage the paint finish. Instead, only use a mild, neutral pH car shampoo
•  External contaminants such as bird droppings, adhesives, insects, and tree sap should be removed promptly and gently from the painted surface before pre-washing. Avoid applying excessive pressure to prevent damage to the paint.
•  Dry dust should not be wiped off, it may lead to permanent scratch marks, which are especially noticeable on matte colours compared to glossy colours.
•  If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash the vehicle with only water to remove excess dirt before proceeding with a full wash.
•  Avoid using automatic car washers with high-pressure brushes, as they can damage the vehicle's surface. It's advisable to use automatic car washers without high-pressure brushes for a gentler cleaning process.
•  Do not apply paint protectors such as wax polish, ceramic coating, or any other surface treatments on matte painted surfaces, as they can cause permanent damage to the paint film.
•  Avoid using paper towels, dirty, or rough cloths to clean or wipe the car, as they can cause scratches. It’s recommended to use only microfiber cloths or sponges for a safe and effective clean.
•  It's recommended not to apply anything to the painted surface, such as stickers, foils, magnetic labels, or masking tapes, as they can cause adhesive transfer, potentially leaving permanent stains.
•  It is advisable to protect vehicle from Greasy, Oily products which may leave stains on paint film, difficult to remove.
•  Recommended to visit an Authorized Mahindra workshops for any paint related repairs.
14.12.8 Paint Chips
•  Authorized Mahindra Service Centers have the exact touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s colour.
•  Take your vehicle to a Authorized Mahindra Service Center for paint touch-up or paint repairs.
•  Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
•  Always read the instructions before using the products.
14.12.9 Alloy Wheels and Wheel Covers (If Equipped)
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat of paint finish. In order to maintain their shine:
•  Clean weekly with wheel and tyre cleaner, which is available at Authorized Mahindra Service Center. Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
•  Never apply any cleaning chemicals to hot or warm wheel rims or covers.
•  Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
14.12.10 Plastic (Non-painted) Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are available at Authorized Mahindra Service Center. You can use these cleaners:
•  For routine cleaning of plastic parts
•  For tar or grease spots
•  For plastic head lamp lenses
14.12.11 Windows and Wiper Blades
The front/rear windshield, side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and smearing of the windshield.
To clean these items follow these tips:
•  The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, available at Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
•  The wiper blades can be cleaned with alcohol or Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate, available at Authorized Mahindra Service Center. This washer fluid contains a special solution in addition to alcohol which helps remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly.
•  Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
•  Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any glass parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to remove decals, as it may cause damage to the glass or rear windshield heater grid lines (If Equipped).
14.12.12 Instrument Panel/Interior Trim and Cluster Lens
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with soap and water using soft microfibre / cotton cloth / sponge, then with a clean and dry white cotton cloth; you may also use Dash and Vinyl Cleaner on the instrument panel and interior trim areas.
•  Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
•  Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on the interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
•  Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth.
•  Apply vinyl cleaner to the wiped area and spread around evenly.
•  Apply cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area and allow this to set in at room temperature for 30 minute.
•  Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the area with a rubbing motion for 60 second.
•  Following this, wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth.
14.12.13 Interior Maintenance
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats:
•  Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
•  Remove light stains and soil with carpet and upholstery cleaner.
•  If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with a stain remover.
•  Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials.
•  Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
14.12.14 Leather Seats (If Equipped)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the leather:
•  To clean, use a soft microfibre / cotton / sponge cloth with a leather and vinyl with approved cleaners. Dry the area with a soft cloth.
•  To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the leather care kit, available from a Authorized Mahindra Service Center.
•  Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of the clear, protective coating.
In some instances, a colour or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, clean the leather immediately to avoid permanent staining.
14.13 Air-Conditioning System Maintenance
Your vehicle’s air-conditioning is a sealed system. Any major maintenance, such as recharging should be done by a qualified technician. However, you can do a few things by yourself to make sure the air-conditioning works efficiently.
Run the air-conditioning system at least once a week, even during the cold weather months. Run it for at least ten minutes with the engine running at normal operating temperature. This circulates the lubricating oil contained in the refrigerant.
Whenever you get the air-conditioning system serviced, make sure the service facility uses a refrigerant recycling system. This system captures the refrigerant for re-use. Releasing the refrigerant into the atmosphere may cause damage to the environment.
14.14 Vehicle Storage
If you are leaving your vehicle for more than 2 weeks, you may want to take stopping to protect your battery. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air-conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air mode and high blower speed setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimise the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
It is recommended storing the vehicle in a covered, clean, dry, well levelled, ventilated and closed place.
14.15 Winter Care
Dealing with Ice: Make sure you have window ice scrapers and de-icers for the locks. When you’re stuck, having a small shovel is useful to dig out of the snow. The weight of a bag of sand in the trunk will give added traction in rear-wheel drive vehicles and can be used to sprinkle on the snow and ice to gain better traction. And don’t forget personal protection such as a warm coat, hat, gloves and a blanket, in case you get stuck in a storm.
Keep Enough Fuel in the Tank: Never let the fuel level in the tank drop below the half-full mark. A sudden storm with unexpected heavy rains could leave you stranded for hours. Having adequate fuel supply will allow you to idle the engine from time to time to keep warm.
Do not: Tap the ice on the window to crack it or chip it for a good place to start scraping. You could end up cracking more than the ice and end up with a cracked or shattered windshield/window.
Pour warm or hot water on the windshield to melt ice. This will crack your windshield.
During Winter Storage: Start the engine occasionally, here are a few pointers to keep in mind:
•  Run it in a well-ventilated area. Carbon monoxide can build up quickly.
•  Run for a minimum of 20 minutes to allow the engine to come up to the normal operating temperature. This will allow the oil to circulate and will also open up the thermostat so that your radiator anti-freeze circulates as well.
•  Start up the air conditioner and/or heater and run both for about 10 minute. Again, circulating fluids is essential for good life of the system.
Exterior: Wash and wax your car to provide an extra layer of protection to your paint.
Vinyl and Rubber: Use a good conditioner on all vinyl and rubber parts to prevent from drying out.
Interior: Clean the glass, shampoo the carpets, dig in between the seats to see what’s there, clean the upholstery in all nooks and corners.
Engine: Check all hoses and wires to make sure everything is in good condition and replace any that need to be. The last thing to do is to make sure the internal components of the engine remain lubricated and don’t corrode.
If the engine is being started after a very long period of non-use, warm up the engine at an idle speed for 2-3 minutes before driving the vehicle.
14.16 Bulb Replacements
14.16.1 Head Lamp Bulb Replacement
Graphic
Below procedure is applicable only for variants having Head lamp bulbs.
To replace the head lamp bulb:
•  Ensure ignition is switched OFF.
•  Remove the wiring connector from the bulb.
•  Detach the bulb assembly by rotating anti clockwise.
•  Insert the connector into the new bulb (of the same wattage), and follow the reverse procedure to assemble the bulb assembly in the headlight assembly.
The head lamp bulb can be replaced without removing the head lamp assembly from the vehicle. The head lamp assembly has been removed here for illustration purpose only.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
To avoid burning yourself, do not replace the light bulbs when they are hot. Halogen bulbs have pressurised gas inside and are to be handled with special care. Mishandling it may cause the bulb to burst or shatter. Hold the bulb with its metal/plastic holder/base and do not touch the glass part with bare hands.
Using bulbs with units of higher output capacity/wattage is illegal and may damage your vehicle’s electrical system.
Replacement bulbs must meet the specification of originally fitted bulbs.
14.17 Projector Head Lamp (If Equipped)
Graphic
A
DRL /Position Lamp
C
Halogen Projector Low Beam
B
Halogen Projector High Beam
D
Turn Lamp
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
To avoid burning yourself, do not replace the light bulbs when they are hot. Halogen bulbs have pressurised gas inside and are to be handled with special care. Mishandling it may cause the bulb to burst or shatter. Hold the bulb with its metal/plastic holder/base and do not touch the glass part with bare hands.
Using bulbs with units of higher output capacity/wattage is illegal and may damage your vehicle’s electrical system. Replacement bulbs must meet the specification of originally fitted bulbs.
14.18 Service Reminder Alert
Navigate to alert history page using the menu button in the steering wheel switch.
Service Reminder alert can be reset by following the below steps:
•  Press and hold the OK button,
•  Turn OFF the ignition. Then turn it back ON while keeping the OK button pressed. Release the OK button after 10 seconds.
Check and ensure that the service reminder alert is not displayed in Alert history.
Service Reminder alert starts to appear 500 km before scheduled service.